Home

SDC15 User's Manual

1. delay time Setting value Setting value delay time Setting value Setting value J 2 second press hold of to Setting displays para key i g PEV i Setup Event configuration DI assignment DO assignment User function Lock Instrument information 2 v in 2 C0 5 Co 30 sco 64 di H UF Idii 3 Ua Eees EG TZ Tag a Sir A a 0 L Jb E bh l FEE UF 1 i diJ g4 L JOIE i g g EE Jm Ca C 58 J ag uF 14 i d9 r a E f L 0b E 34 L 64 Rat Ji HE 5 i dus FAT A F JA 1 Jt Loud S u L ILI iw HE amp F FHA TD EN er di 19 as uq Es F 7 uF i idli SUE YP a U iie B g7 a e E ea rJ UF i dv si a aj para key 8 Eo E 44 sE 74 cim El ISl CCA e aea 0 FF TT O eF gt r T L ii Yo SCE 7h x to iB 4 iil L 14 48 E IE feu 49 79 Legi W BU C ee L Si LI F L eh L Ae TET TE Notes l l l 2 o o o SS 1 The parameters and numerical values registered as user functions UF cd Tr AY are displayed te L c 85 2 If no key is pressed for 3 minutes the display automatically returns r G6 to PV display i ai 3 If the lt key is pressed while holding down the para key various F displays settings can be nav
2. is turned ON PV value 3 LSP i i i mw im group nm Manipulated Heat manipulated Cool manipulated 4gg para key GP i number variable HEAL variable variable et Gu i gt ie poy Pic 5S gt ESD N SP value SP value MV value MV value MV value m lt v O r TE UF 8 4 UF 1 UFP UF Dl Upper and lower displays gt co gt remain off for 6s after 555E BEBE Goa elite power ON Each mode if S gacond brass indicator lights sequentially hold of P and then the operation para key display appears a mode SP Event PID Parameter Extended tuning g gt V n Gp E Tf AUTO MANUAL yi el fi im fa CF ICL Ha A n A 7 e138 is C Alko G _AAn E iHa d i For change For change a from MANUAL from AUTO E lon E E H to AUTO to MANUAL z to Q 10 4 E lor LE g on i 3 P L mes ESSE G Z ESHY d iE E5on ol it C C z ray E 5a oH IE para key 3 2 second press hold of para key D 2 O Some items are not displayed depending on the availability of optional functions model number display setup Z713 to 78 and display level 74 O Pressing para while changing settings has the effect of canceling and moving to the next item Operation displays PV value a CT1 F CT2 a I
3. Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power terminals Doing so might cause electric shock A CAUTION Use the SDC15 within the operating ranges recommended in the specifications temperature humidity voltage vibration shock mounting direction atmosphere etc Do not block ventilation holes Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation Wire the SDC15 properly according to predetermined standards Also wire the SDC15 using specified power leads according to recognized installation methods Failure to do so might cause electric shock fire or faulty operation Do not allow lead clippings metal shavings or water to enter the controller case Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation Firmly tighten the terminal screws at the torque listed in the specifications Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause electric shock or fire Do not use unused terminals on the SDC15 as relay terminals Doing so might cause electric shock fire or faulty operation We recommend attaching the terminal cover sold separately after wiring the SDC15 Failure to do so might cause electric shock fire or faulty operation Use the relays within the recommended life Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation Use Yamatake Corporation s SurgeNon if there is the risk of power surges caused by lightning Not doing so might cause fire or faulty operation D
4. Press the para key once The upper display says r r and the lower display says ra or rin a The current mode is indicated by rta for RUN mode or ref for READY mode When v or A is pressed the lower display flashes If the DI assignment is set to RUN READY selection the display does not flash and no change can be made Press para repeatedly to get on the upper display The lower display says 4 When lt v or A is pressed the rightmost digit on the lower display flashes and can lt v display spcis When v or A is pressed rsm or rat on the lower display flashes Start from the operation display if necessary press mode once to get the operation If no key is pressed for more than 2s the displayed value is set and the display changes from flashing to ___ continuously lit Press and hold para for more than 2s to get the parameter setup display 5 is shown on the upper display 3 F is displayed on Press para repeatedly to get i for propor tional band on the upper display The value set for the lower display If the control method is ON OFF control nothing is displayed When lt v or A is pressed the rightmost digit on the lower display flashes and can be changed to the desired value for the proportional band In this case the flashin
5. eeee T T 6 8 E Setup bank ASRS LARA T LRDEE RE ERS ORES 6 8 E Event configuration bank ss seeee cece cece cere eee eecerees 6 13 E DI Assignment bank ceceece ces eeeecnceeeeeeees dsdeceeaue 6 16 E DO Assignment bank OTC eT eee rer err ee Terre E 6 19 E User Function Bank es is0issiscoscisciadscesidesiasteuessddes hadesades 6 23 E L ck Baris c4cceccnciaceyerscenfiigeadenkndeesdulareesddstediaasseesenws 6 23 E Instrument information bank ccceccccccccccecccecccecceene 6 24 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 1 Outline of ComMuUniCatlOnss sis iscvcscisssscdiesseessaceiasacesscneses aes 7 1 E Features s acesdsccdiviesccddnescsucdawes EEE ET E E E EET E 7 1 ME Setup seeseseseserroserercorecereoseoercceroereceroerceecoerceeeeee 7 1 M Communications procedures ssssssssssessessessesesesseres 7 2 7 2 Message SUCUS secr rriro rrea Aar ET AA 7 3 M Message Structure sssesseserecsecesecsececeeseceeececeseeceees 7 3 E D ta linklayer lt ciciccecsssceccssesenpeseebereensoqiererieieseeseasieses 7 3 E Application layer esseseseresesesesesserssececccrercesececerereee 7 5 7 3 Description of Commands Peete ee eee ee TE 7 6 E Continuous data read command RS command sssessesesesseses 7 6 E Continuous data write command WS command ssssssssssssseess 7 7 E Fixed length continuous data read command RD command 7 8 E Fixed length cont
6. Mode bank selection PV range type setup Press the para key Press the v or a key Press the para key MV Maispay P bank selection Temperature unit setu Press the para key i Press the para key Press the v or a key Press the para key F Other banks Other display and setup Other display and setup Operate the para key Chere ne Lo y Operate the para key repeatedly repeatedly repeatedly Press the para key Press the v or a key Press the para key Press the para key Keep the para key pressed for 2 sec or longer The display and setup status shown above are examples for explanation Therefore some displays or settings are not shown actually according to the model and or setup contents C Handling Precautions e For details about display and setup contents of the operation display bank selection display and bank setting display gt List of Operation Displays on page 6 1 List of Parameter Setting Displays on page 6 3 List of Setup Setting Displays on page 6 8 In the lists shown above a bank belonging to each setting item is described e When pressing the lt key with the para key kept pressed instead of pressing of the para key in the operation display or setting item display mode various displays and settings can be operated in the reverse order However the operation becomes invalid that both the para key and lt key are kept pressed
7. Slal lt elelelslsls a 2 2 2 8le s e s D e a E A E Q B 2 2 2 3 oO n 4 fp sd oe Same as RAM address 14596 decimal Writing is enabled under no DI Assignment and other conditions 0 AUTO mode 1 MANUAL mode o e 2 e x Same as RAM address 14595 decimal Writing is enabled under no DI Assignment conditions 0 RUN mode 1 READY mode X Same as RAM address 14598 decimal x Same as RAM address 14597 decimal Writing is enabled under no DI Assignment and other conditions ua aie 0 AT stop 1 AT start z S Z fe o pu gt s lt Writing is enabled under no DI Assignment conditions 0 Latch continue 1 Latch release Release all DO latches 9005 232D 25389 632D 9101 238D 25485 638D Same as RAM address 14356 decimal vu Les SP Target value Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bank Item name RAM address EEPROM address EEPROM Decimal point Remarks Operation LSP group selection 9103 238F 25487 638F Same as RAM address display 14592 decimal Writing is enabled under no DI Assignment conditions eE 3 Reserved for future extension 9104 2390 25488 6390 ea x MV Manipulated Variable 9105 2391 25489 6391 aa as RAM address 14594 decimal Writing is enabled in the MANUAL mode Heat MV Manipulated Variable 9106 2392 25490 6392 Lede as RAM address Le dec
8. l 1 i I I I Cut Lae a C Handling Precautions e If the data does not start flashing even though the lt v or a key is pressed this data cannot be changed For example when the RUN READY is assigned in the DI Assignment RUN READY cannot be selected using the key on the front panel Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS e If the character string cannot be changed using the v key while the entire character string is flashing press the a key On the contrary if the character string cannot be changed using the A key press the v key e When pressing the para key while the display is flashing the next data is displayed without changing of the data Additionally when pressing the mode key while the display is flashing the display is returned to the operation display without changing of the data e The MV manipulated variable display in the MANUAL mode continues the flashing status even after pressing of the key has been stopped At this time the flashing value is output as MV E mode key operating procedures When the mode key is kept pressed for sec or longer on the operation display the selection operation which has been set using the mode key function C72 of the setup setting can be performed The Figure on the right shows an example that the mode key is pressed in the RUN READY selection m TT C72 2 setting DLI 1 If the current mode is the
9. Notsetting No decimal point 0 to 1800 C o 3300 F ing No decimal point 0 0 to 500 0 C Oto 900 F Not setting No decimal point 0 to 1300 C o 2300 F ing No decimal point 0 to 1300 C o 2300 F ing No decimal point 1 The accuracy of a B thermocouple is 5 FS for a Oto 1400 C o 2400 F ina No decimal point range of 260 C or less 1 FS for 260 to 800 C 0 to 2300 C o 4200 F ing No decimal point The indicated low limit for a B thermocouple is 20 C DIN U 200 0 to 400 0 C 300 to 700 F ing No decimal point However if ROM version 1 of the instrument 100 0 to 800 0 C 150 to 1500 F ing No decimal point ao bank t is prior to 2 04 the value is 180 C 2 PL Il thermocouple is a range which has been added to the units manufactured from July 2003 rm DWInDIDIAPMy eS je je RIAA IA oo IN lS ja IB Jo Jo OP PIA S e Scaling range is 1999 to 9999 ee ee e When C01 is changed the range C05 C06 O Oto3 Nochange default defaults to 0 to 1000 89 0to20mA to 90 4to20mA 003 No change o Handling Precautions e When the C01 PV input range number is set the decimal point position and range are initially set automatically as shown in the tables For details on the decimal point refer to the description of setup C04 decimal point position
10. User Function Utilization User Function 1 User Function 2 User Function 3 User Function 4 User Function 5 User Function 6 User Function 7 User Function 8 5 79 Output low limit Cool 5 14 Output high limit Cool User Function User Function 1 5 76 User Function 2 5 76 Parameter Control method MV low limit at AT MV high limit at AT Differential for ON OFF control SP up ramp SP down ramp Extended tuning AT type Just FiTTER settling band SP lag constant User Function 7 5 79 User Function 8 5 79 5 13 Lock 5 30 Key lock 5 83 5 30 Communication lock 5 83 Password 1B 5 84 Password 2B 5 84 Instrument information ROM ID 6 19 ST step settling width 5 17 ROM version 1 6 19 ST hunting settling width 5 17 ST step ramp change 5 17 Manufacturing date code month day 6 19 Serial No 6 19 Note The figures shown on the right of the display and setting columns in the tree structure indicate the relevant pages 2 2 Display when the power Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS The mode indicators are lit sequentially from the left during a period of 6 sec after the power has been turned ON while both the upper display and lower display are off When all mode indicators have been lit the is turned ON azbil w Off 2 Off oe E E aes The
11. When the lt v or A key is press ed the rightmost digit on the lower display flashes and the SP can be changed to the desired value In this case the flashing of the numerical value implies that it is not yet set A numerical setting that is being changed flashes the same way If an SP limit is in effect the numerical value cannot be changed to a value above the limit The SP limit must be changed first If no key is pressed for more than 2s is set and the display changes from flashing to continuously lit If the mode key is pressed when the display is flashing the status returns to that of step 1 e For step numbers indicated in red like 4 the following precaution applies If the key lock is set the numerical value does not flash and the value cannot be changed To change a numerical value cancel the key lock first RUN READY mode selection Setup of event value Start from the operation display if necessary press mode once to get the operation display Press and hold para for more than 2s to get the parameter setup display 5 is shown on the upper display In case of ON OFF control r appears on the upper display Start from the operation display if necessary press mode once to get the operation display Press and hold para for more than 2s to get the parameter setup display Ais shown on the upper display
12. Setup setting DI 2 Function 2 A or B and C or D Assignment bank 3 Function 3 A or B or C or D 4 Function 4 A B D Internal Contact 2 Input bit nee alee ane Sean function Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 3 Input bit function Setup setting DI Assignment bank e When the set value is 0 the input bit function is not used and the default input is used The following shows the default input of each internal contact Internal Contact 1 DI digital input 1 Internal Contact 2 DI digital input 2 Internal Contact 3 OFF status e In the input bit function the logical operations AND OR of each of internal contacts 1 to 3 are combined In input bit functions 1 to 4 the combination of the logical operations may vary The following shows one logical operation Logical AND Logical OR OFF and OFF OFF OFF or OFF OFF ON and OFF OFF ON or OFF ON ON andON ON ON or ON ON e OFF is contact open OPEN or 0 when expressed using the numerical value e ON is contact close CLOSE or 1 when expressed using the numerical value 5 34 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Input assign The assign of four inputs A B C D used for the input bit function can be set Internal Contact 1 Input 0 Normally opened OFF 0 High function assign A 1 Normally closed ON 1 Setup setting DI 2 D Assignment bank 3 DI2 4 to 9 Undefined
13. 13 5 Appendix Appendix Glossary Abbreviations are used in the descriptions tables and figures in this manual The following shows the main abbreviations AT Auto Tuning CT Current Transformer DI Digital Input DO Digital Output Control outputs of relay and voltage pulse and event output EV Event LSP Local Set Point The meaning of LSP and SP is same in case of the SDC15 MFB Motor Feed Back This indicates the feed back of motor opening which is used for position proportional control This controller does not have MFB function MV Manipulated Variable PV Process Variable RSP Remote Set Point This is the set point which is set by the analog input from an external device This controller does not have RSP function SP Set Point ST Self Tuning U Unit This indicates the minimum digit of the selected PV input range with industrial unit C Pa I min etc 1U 1 C ina range of 200 to 200 C 1U 0 1 C in a range of 0 0 to 200 0 C Additionally 1U 0 01 when the DC voltage input is scaled to 0 00 to 10 00 Furthermore 0 1U means 1 10 of 1U Appendix 1 Index Number 3 WITE SYStCMN e eee cece cece e eee e cence ee eeee 4 5 5 wire SYSCEM e eee e ee eee cece e eee eee ence eens 4 6 A RECOSONCS cn 0 sadetw reese seus venennsaer ace rene 1 3 Alatin COdErictssrrosrosridesebiine tano ueraia 10 1 Alai erinteni edea a Dn 5 44 Application example sssssserreseereerereee 5 59 Appli
14. 5 13 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E PID control P Proportional band Parameter setup PID bank Integral time Parameter setup PID bank D Derivative time Parameter setup PID bank Manual reset Parameter setup PID bank MV low limit Parameter setup PID bank MV high limit Parameter setup PID bank P Proportional band cool Parameter setup PID bank Integral time cool Parameter setup PID bank D Derivative time cool Parameter setup PID bank Output low limit Cool Parameter setup PID bank Output high limit Cool Parameter setup PID bank e The following describes examples showing how to use the ON OFF control action point offset To turn OFF the output at 205 C or more and turn ON the output at less than 190 C with the heat control and SP 200 C the differential is set to 15 C and the offset is set to 5 C To turn OFF the output at 5 C or less and turn ON the output at more than 10 C with the cool control and SP 10 C the differential is set to 5 C and the offset is set to 5 C In the fixed PID control or ST self tuning the PID control related items can be set p 0 1 to 999 9 5 0 Simple t Standard High function 0 to 9999s No integration control action when set at 0 0 to 9999s No derivative control action when set at 0 10 0 to 110 0 10 0 to 110 0 Standard High function 10 0 to
15. Chapier 7 Chapier 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 This guide contains menu flowcharts parameter settings lists and concrete opera tion examples with illustrations Look at these pages first for an effective overview of the SDC15 OVERVIEW This chapter describes the applications features model selection guide and part names and functions of this unit Since the part names described in this chapter are used in the subsequent descriptions the part names and functions of this unit must be understood correctly in this chapter OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS This chapter describes the outline and operation flow of the functions of this unit INSTALLATION This chapter describes the environmental conditions installation dimensions installation procedures and necessary tools when installing this unit WIRING This chapter describes the wiring procedures wiring precautions and connection examples DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION This chapter describes each function of this unit in detail LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA This chapter lists up the display items of this unit and their contents CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS This chapter describes how to communicate this unit with a host unit such as a personal computer or PLC through Yamatake s standard CPL communication using RS 485 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS This chapter describes how to communicate this unit with a host
16. setting changing cannot be made e When locked with the password the display and setting of key lock objects cannot be made Even with a communications lock or loader lock read write of the parameters below is possible Decimal point position Mode AUTO MANUAL RUN READY AT stop start Release all DO latches Operation display lt SP Target value LSP group selection Manipulated Variable MV Heat Manipulated Variable Heat MV Cool Manipulated Variable Cool MV AT progress Current transformer CT current value 1 Current transformer CT current value 2 Timer remaining time 1 Timer remaining time 2 Timer remaining time 3 Timer remaining time 4 Timer remaining time 5 LSP value in use PV before ratio bias and filter Status Input alarm status 5 83 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Password The setting changing of the key lock communication lock and loader lock can be set disabled using the password Password display p A g Z 0to15 Simple Setup setting Lock bank tt 5 Password 1A to 2B display The a value Standard becomes 0 when High function a is turned Password 1A J 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 Simple Setup setting Lock bank If Standard High function Password 2A 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 Setup setting Lock bank Password 1B th 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 Setup setting Lock bank oO Password 2B 2h
17. 4 Data address 2 5 Data address n Response message If the message is sent successfully the termination code is taken to be normal two decimal digits and returned appended with the read data count four hexadecimal digits X read data count specified by the command If message transmission ends in error the termination code is taken to be in error two decimal digits and returned without the read data appended e Normal termination olg io tf M 3 4 e Abnormal termination The abnormal termination code is entered at XX 1 gt List of Termination Codes on page 7 14 1 Termination code 2 Data 1 3 Data 2 to n 1 4 Data n Maximum read data count per message Up to 28 words for both RAM and EEPROM areas 7 10 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Fixed length random data write command WU command Send message Response message This command writes data to random non continuous addresses in two byte units Data is expressed as four hexadecimal digits Data is sent for the specified write data count with the data address four hexadecimal digits of the data to be written and the data four hexadecimal digits as a pair WOO i i ye Mol 8 4 5 6 1 Fixed length random data write command 2 Sub commanad fixed to 00 3 Data address 1 4 Write data 1 5 Data address n 6 Write data n If writing is successful the normal termination code two
18. 0 1 bit 1 2 bits Response time out 1 to 250ms Key operation type 0 Standard type 1 Special type mode key function 0 Invalid 1 AUTO MANUAL selection 2 RUN READY selection 3 AT Stop Start 4 LSP group selection 5 Release all DO latches 6 Invalid 7 Communication DI1 selection 8 Invalid MODE display setup Whether or not the mode bank setup is displayed is determined by the sum of the following weights Bit 0 AUTO MANUAL display Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Bit 1 RUN READY display Disabled 0 Enabled 2 Bit 3 AT stop start display Disabled 0 Enabled 8 Bit 4 Release all DO latches display Disabled 0 Enabled 16 Bit 5 Communication DI1 ON OFF display Disabled 0 Enabled 32 Other invalid settings 0 4 64 128 PV SP display setup Whether or not the PV SP value related items are displayed in the basic display mode is determined by the sum of the following weights Bit 0 PV display Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Bit 1 SP display Disabled 0 Enabled 2 Bit 2 LSP group number display Disabled 0 Enabled 4 Other invalid settings 0 8 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level MV display setup Whether or not the PV SP value 15 related items are displayed in the basic display mode is determined by the sum of the following weights Bit 0 MV display Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Bit 1 Heat MV cool MV display Disabled
19. 1564 21988 5564 Control output 1 Output assign D 5605 15E5 21989 5565 Control output 1 Polarity A 5606 15E6 21990 5566 Control output 1 Polarity B 5607 15E7 21991 5567 Control output 1 Polarity C 5608 15e8 21992 5568 Control output 1 Polarity D 5609 15E9 21993 5569 Control output 1 Polarity 5610 15EA 21994 556a 2 La ai BE Control output 1 Latch 5611 Control output 2 Operation type 5612 55EC Control output 2 Output assign A 5613 Control output 2 Output assign B Control output 2 Output assign C Control output 2 Output assign D Control output 2 Polarity A 5617 Control output 2 Polarity B Control output 2 Polarity C Control output 2 Polarity D 9 4 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bank Item name RAM address Decimal point Remarks Assignment Control output 2 Latch 5622 15F6 22006 sore P ss Event output 1 Operation type 5623 15F7 22007 5577 Event output 1 Output assign A 5624 15F8 22008 sore Event output 1 Output assign B 5625 15F9 22009 55F9 Event output 1 Output assign C 5626 15FA 22010 sora Event output 1 Output assign D 5627 15FB 22011 55B Event output 1 Polarity A 5628 15FC 22012 sorc Event output 1 Polarity B 5629 15FD 22013 sorD Event output 1 Polarity C 5630 15FE 22014 sore Event output 1 Pol
20. 6 Precautions for ST Self tuning When using the ST function the following cautions must be observed strictly 5 26 Before starting the ST function put the PV input and operation end heater power etc in the controllable status Before starting the ST function set the PID constants so that the PID control can be performed correctly The default settings before shipment are that the proportional band P 1 5 0 integration time I 1 120s and derivative time d 1 30s These default settings apply to the PID control of general control subjects e When the integration time I 1 Os the ST is not started e When the derivative time d 1 Os the ST is not started To stop the control with the power to the controller kept turned ON change the mode to the READY mode and stop the operation at the operation end turn OFF the heater power Additionally to restart the control start the operation at the operation end turn ON the heater power and then change the mode to the RUN mode C Handling Precautions e If any cautions described above are not observed the PID constants are changed to incorrect values when the ST is completed This may cause poor control results e When the power to the controller is turned OFF while the ST is running LED is flashing the PID constants are not changed Additionally if the power is turned OFF immediately before the ST is completed incorrect PID constant valu
21. Invalid in this unit NOoaRWNM O Internal Event 1 The digits are determined to 1st digit 0000 0 Configuration 2 2nd digit 3rd digit and 4th digit from the right end 1st digit Direct 0 Direct Reverse 1 Reverse 2nd digit Standby 0 None 1 Standby 2 Standby Standby at SP change 3rd digit EVENT state 0 Continue at READY 1 Forced OFF CJ Handling Precautions e If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank 2 is prior to 2 04 33 cannot be set as Internal Event configuration 1 operation type Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Internal Event The digits are determined to 1st digit 0000 Configuration 3 2nd digit 3rd digit and 4th digit from the right end 1st digit Controller 0 None alarm OR 1 Alarm direct OR operation 2 Alarm direct AND operation 3 Alarm reverse OR operation 4 Alarm reverse AND operation 2nd digit Special OFF 0 As usual setup 1 When the event set value main setting is 0 the event is OFF 3rd digit Delay unit 0 0 1s 1 1s 2 1min ath digit Undefined OCS Internal Event 2 Same as Internal Event 1 Configuration 1 Configuration 1 Operation type Internal Event 2 Same as Internal Event 1 0000 Configuration 2 Configuration 2 1st digit Direct Reverse 2nd digit Standby 3rd digit EVENT state at READY Ath digit Undefined Internal Event 2 Same as Internal Event 1
22. No CP SP 1148E SDC15 Single Loop Controller User s Manual for Installation amp Configuration Thank you for purchasing the SDC15 Single Loop Controller This manual contains information for ensuring correct use of the SDC15 It also provides necessary information for installation maintenance and trou bleshooting This manual should be read by those who design and maintain devices that use the SDC15 Be sure to keep this manual nearby for handy reference Yamatake Corporation Getting Up to Speed with the SDC15 The quick reference guide on pages D 1 to D 8 summarizes key operations parameters and settings and gives concrete operation examples using illustrations Try looking at these pages first and then read the main text for details A separate color version of the quick guide printed on dirt resistant paper is available for convenient use on the work site document No CP SP 1213E Contact Yamatake Corporation or a distributor for details NOTICE Be sure that the user receives this manual before the product is used Copying or duplicating this user s manual in part or in whole is forbid den The information and specifications in this manual are subject to change without notice Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free from inaccuracies and omissions If you should find an error or omis sion please contact Yamatake Corporation In no event is
23. Note 5 Event relay output 2 points independent contact Note 1 Event relay output 2 points independent contact Note 3 Current transformer input 2 points Note 5 Digital input 2 points Note 1 Event relay output 2 points independent contact Note 3 Current transformer input 2 points Note 5 RS 485 communication fo O oa Can not be selected for the C15S Only 1a contact is applicable for C15S No additional processing Inspection Certificate provided YO Complying with the traceability certification Current transformer sold separately Socket sold separately Can not be selected for the DC Model E Accessories and optional parts Chapter 1 OVERVIEW Mounting bracket for C15T Current transformer 5 8mm hole dia Current transformer 12mm hole dia Socket for C15S L shaped plug adaptor 81446403 001 Accessory 81409657 001 Accessory QN206A QN212A 81446391 001 81446442 001 81446443 001 81446898 001 SLP C35J50 81441057 001 Chapter 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 Part Names and Functions E Main body and console Console azbil SDC15 pv Upper display sp EL Displ ee ower Display 9 o 09000 Mode indicator LYA JD f para key lt v and a keys E Main body Main body Contains the electric circuit for I O signals of measuring instruments CPU and memory Console Contains the display panel showing numeric
24. Other commands None Word address RS WS 501W etc Other commands 01F5 etc Read count Numerical value of characters expressed as 1 for example Numerical value RS WS Numerical value of characters expressed as 100 for example to be written Other commands Numerical value of characters expressed in hexadecimal as 0064 for example 7 5 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 3 Description of Commands E Continuous data read command RS command 7 6 Send message Response message This command reads data of continuous addresses by a single command This command enables the content of continuous data addresses starting with the specified read start address to be read as a single message The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the send message when the data is read 1 Continuous read command 2 Data delimiter 3 Word address 4 Read data count If the message is correctly received a response message corresponding to the command content is returned The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the response message when the data is read Maximum read data count per message e Normal termination reading of single data item DO i i 0o e Normal termination reading of multiple data items COREE hn reas i o o o e Abnormal termination The abnormal termination code is entered at XX 1 gt List of
25. Password display Oto 15 5 Password 1A to 2B display Password 1A 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 i Password 2A 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 ical Password 1B 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 Displayed when the password display PASS is 5 and two sets of passwords 1A and 1B 2A and 2B are matched Displayed when the password display PASS is PSeb Password 2B 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 oo 5 6 23 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA E Instrument information bank Bank selection gd Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level firmware ROM Version 1 XX XX 2 digits after decimal point ears Setting is disabled ROM Version 2 XX XX 2 digits after decimal point 2 D Oo o o o o Zaj Ca ea ca ea 2 Bryer sc yy aa a EST Information za a eh date Subtract 2000 from the year Manufacturing date and unit code year Example 3 means the year 2003 identification No Setting is disabled D DL co ea oc a Manufacturing date Month Day divided by 100 code month day Example 12 01 means the 1st day of December C 6 24 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 1 Outline of Communications If the optional model number is provided with the RS 485 communications function communications with a PC PLC or other host devices are available using a user prepared program The communications protocol
26. Standard High function Standard High function Simple Standard High function Standard High function Simple Standard High function 5 Standard High function Simple Standard High function Standard High function Simple Standard High function Standard High function Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION e When the internal event configuration 1 operation type is set at 0 No event the internal event main setting sub setting and hysteresis are not displayed e For details about internal event operation with main setting sub setting and hysteresis CF List of internal event operations on pages 5 39 to 5 41 E ON delay and OFF delay ON delay is a function that delays the timing at which the internal event status is changed from OFF to ON OFF delay is a function that delays the timing at which the internal event status is changed from ON to OFF However when the operation type is set at 20 Loop diagnosis 1 21 Loop diagnosis 2 22 Loop diagnosis 3 or 32 Timer the ON delay and OFF delay are operated as another function gt List of internal event operations on pages 5 39 to 5 41 ON delay and OFF delay can be set 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 0s or Os High function E Internal Event 1 ON delay Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 1 OFF delay Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 2 ON delay Parameter
27. reste aor mseor ower id Same as above e a ee s a a owes es Festa a o owe Seneasatoe P Proportional band P 1 12288 3000 28672 7000 ft Integral time I 1 2289 soot 2673 7201 D Dervave tine soca aasre moe Manual eset FE soos s roost 7 _ Output Tow it OL o r roe S _ Oubattigh mons Tee0e sons coorr ros _ P Proportional band cool P 1 C 12836 3o30 28720 7030 1 Integral time cool l 1 12337 3031 28721 231 J i D Derivative time cool D 1 C 12338 3032 28722 7x32 Reserved for future extension 12339 3033 28723 7033 a a a Output low limit Cool OL1 C 12340 3034 28724 7034 Output high limit Cool OH1 C 12341 3035 28725 735 Internal Event 1 main setti 13056 3300 29440 7300 Internal Event 1 sub setting 13057 3301 2441 7301 f Internal Event 2 main setti 13058 3302 29442 z302 Internal Event 2 sub setting 13059 3303 29443 7303 Internal Event 3 main setti 13060 3304 29444 7304 ie 7 Internal Event 3 sub setting Internal Event 4 main setti Internal Event 4 sub setting Internal Event 5 main setti 13064 3308 20448 7308 Internal Event 5 sub setting 13065 3309 29449 730
28. 0 Enabled 2 Bit 3 AT progress display Disabled 0 Enabled 8 Other invalid settings 0 4 EV display setup 0 Internal Event set value is not Setup setting Setup displayed in the operation display bank mode Set value of Internal Event 1 is displayed in the operation display mode Set values of Internal Events 1 to 2 are displayed in the operation display mode Set values of Internal Events 1 to 3 are displayed in the operation display mode Timer remain time ON OFF delay remain time of display setup Internal Event is not displayed in the operation display mode ON OFF delay remain time of Internal Event 1 is displayed in the operation display mode ON OFF delay remain time of Internal Events 1 to 2 is displayed in the operation display mode ON OFF delay remain time of Internal Events 1 to 3 is displayed in the operation display mode CT display setup CT current value is not displayed in the operation display mode CT1 current value is displayed in the operation display mode CT1 to 2 current values are displayed in the operation display mode Simple configuration Standard configuration High function configuration Communication Not used monitor display Flashing while data is sending through RS 485 communication Flashing while data is receiving through RS 485 communication Logical OR of all DI statuses Flashing in READY mode 800 turns If the controller model h
29. 22222 sece _ seco isor 222s secr eo ieo 22a seo _ Cen re s o a a pg 5845 56D5 6002 5772 6003 5773 6004 5774 6005 5775 6006 5776 6007 5777 6008 5778 6009 5779 6010 577A 6011 577B 6012 577C 6013 577D 6014 577E 6015 577F 6016 5780 6018 5782 6019 5783 6020 5784 mA ae oe eae L es a a T ae a ee alsia C e a a J e ea a pa fa a ee ae aa eS pa a CI EE a aes ers an ca EES SS ia a es a T ee ie a a Sas JP a Tt ts a a CEEA IEA Aae a i Sara a a a a a ee ew kes ot ts ae a oe Lala P Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA 7 o e ee eee a a oe en e a oe ef fo Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension LSP1 Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension LSP2 Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension LSP3 Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension LSP4 Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Internal Event 1 main setting Internal Event 1 sub setting Internal Event 1 Hysteresis Internal Event 1 ON delay time Internal Event 1 OFF delay time Internal Event 2 main setting Internal Event 2 sub setting
30. 50 0 100 0 MV 0 0 50 0 100 0 MV Dead zone 0 0 Dead zone gt 0 0 Absolute value of dead zone 100 0 om 100 0 Cool MV pS Heat MV 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 0 100 0 MV Dead zone lt 0 0 Constants oL and oH function as shown in the Figure below 100 oH oH heat cool oL oL cool heat gt 0 100 5 16 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E ST Self tuning The following ST related items can be set ST step execution z 0 00 to 99 99 10 00 High function resolution width Parameter setup Extended tuning bank ST step settling width 0 0 to 10 00 0 50 Parameter setup Extended tuning bank ST hunting settling width 5 L j lh 0 0 to 10 00 1 00 Parameter setup Extended aaa tuning bank ST step ramp change 0 ST is executed when the PV moves up or Standard Parameter setup Extended down High function tuning bank 1 ST is executed only when the PV moves up e When the control method is set at ST CtrL 2 the display and setting can be made e Function of ST step execution resolution width St SA When the value of the SP change width to the PV range is larger than the set value the ST is started with the step response e Function of ST step settling width St Sb When the value of the absolute value deviation to the PV range is smaller than the set value this is judged as that the step response is settled in ST e Function of S
31. Current transformer Hole diameter 12mm Socket For C15S Hard cover Chapter 13 SPECIFICATIONS Front panel of the unit conforms to IP66 NEMA 4 Individual panel mounting with attached gaskets AC power model Max 12VA 8VA at 100Vac and 12VA at 264Vac When using the functions similar to those of Yamatake s SDC10 the power consumption is 6VA at 100Vac and 9VA at 264Vac DC power model Max 7VA 24Vac Max 5W 24 to 48Vdc 2000m or less Between power supply terminal and secondary terminal 500Vdc 1OMQ or more AC power model Between power supply terminal and secondary terminal 1500Vac for 1 min DC power model Between power supply terminal and secondary terminal 500Vac for 1min AC power model Max 20A DC power model Max 20A Max 20ms AC model No power failure allowed DC model Panel mounting type Approx 150g including mounting bracket Socket mounting type Approx 200g including socket Panel mounting type 0 4 to0 6N m Socket mounting type 0 78 to 0 98N m or less CE EN61010 1 EN61326 1 UL File No E96090 Category II IEC60364 4 443 IEC60664 1 Pollution degree 2 Polyester film Dark gray DK546 Reformed PPE Light gray DIC650 Model No 81446403 001 Accessory 81409657 001 Accessory QN206A QN212A 81446391 001 81446442 001 81446443 001 81446898 001 E Accessories and optional parts Name SLP C35J50 81441057 001 Smart Loader Package L shaped plug adaptor
32. Data length r 4 7 0 7 bit Same as o 1 8 bit Data format Parity C 58 0 Even parity Same as above 1 Odd parity 2 No parity Data format 69 9 1 stop bit Stop bit 1 2 stop bits Same as above Response time out 1 to 250 ms High function CJ Handling Precautions e Setups can be performed through key operation on the console or the smart loader package SLP C35 However they cannot be performed via RS 485 communications e f you use the Yamatake CMC10L as an RS 232C RS 485 converter set the response time out C70 to 3 ms or longer 7 1 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Communications procedures The communications procedure is as follows 1 The instruction message is sent from the host device master station to one SDCI15 unit slave station to communicate with 2 The slave station receives the instruction message and performs read or write processing according to the content of the message 3 The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as a response message 4 The master station receives the response message CJ Handling Precautions It is not allowed to use two or more number of protocols together on one and the same RS 485 transmission line such as CPL MODBUS ASCII format and MODBUS RTU format 7 2 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 2 Message Structure E Message structure E Data link layer Outline The following shows the messa
33. E PV input range low limit high limit cece ee eee eee eeeeeee 5 5 E PY ratio and PV bidS lt 6 sscisdsdscisccsscvacsisassicarsesaddecssear roses 5 5 aS eer err rere er re Terr re errr eer rer rer 5 6 E PV hold icsccsccscaecscceseiccaciavecetecdateuweiesenseieseapeaeeeeeiaees 5 6 E PV low limit high limit and PV low limit high limit alarms 5 6 Ke MOGs sc deceieechnencie bb tare hunie aee retta ore haen anara nncees 5 7 E AUTOMANUAL Mod irriisrtiinkertie hipte ekant ANERE OFERTOS EA 5 7 E RUNREADY MOd6 csccsicdceccicassertscssccasonycae ewer encseax ods gien 5 7 E AT Auto Tuning stop Start cece cece cece cnc eeeecnceeeees 5 8 E Release all DO digital output latches see e eee e eee DEn 5 8 E Communication DI digital input 1 sees eee ee ence eee eens 5 8 Eg Conlon ckcacs ene decsaeieedseeeedesereanedaseeeeanseshaudaesaaniaeas 5 9 E Contre MG hod isseccseetcccsiieencsees ee bcideecdrchinediesseedieses 5 11 E Control action and Heat Cool control sssssssssesesessssssseses 5 12 H Special control outputs LEELA KS RAR SOR ema aaa 5 12 E MANUAL mode change PE EELE T AEN TATT TATEN 5 13 E ON OFF control EEA E E E E T A TE dedunewae 5 13 E PID comol c ores wecsstee conse hdcieriensesees casdievehebedeesuecease 5 14 E HeatiCool COMM sse6icciscciecisceiadsscsieedsecseedecaasasans coed en 5 15 MST Self tuning eee e cece eee e cece eee ee cece eee
34. OFF dl an ON OFF c35 CT1 operation type O Heater bumout detection 1 Current value measurement 0 o o37 CT1 output O to 1 Control output 1 to 2 2 to 4 Event output 1 to 3 0 o38 CT1 measurement wait time 30 to 300ms 30 c39 CT2 operation type Same as CT1 0 Pad cua CT2 output Same as CT1 0 BD SP bank SH CT2 measurement wait time Same as CT1 30 z a z ee Control output 1 range 1 4 to 20mA 2 0 to 20mA 1 Display item Contents Initial value Seting value 43 Control output 1 type 0 MV 1 Heat MV 2 Cool MV 3 PV 0 5P fto SP 4 SP of LSP 1 group to 4 group SP low limit to SP high limit 0 rer 4 PV before ratio bias and filter a 5 SP 6 Deviation 7 CT1 current value 5 8 CT2 current value_10 SP MV_11 PV MV a EHH Control output 1 scaling low limit 1999 to 9999U 0 0 Pad S ENS Control output 1 scaling high limi 100 0 lt Event bank 5 C46 Control output 1 MV scaling 0 to 9999 Valid when control output 1 type is 10 or 11 200 Display tem Contents Initial value Setingvaue 2 paH Control output 2 range Same as control output 1 1 ii z o tue Control output 2 type Same as control output 1 3 E i toES _ Internal Event 1 to 5 main setting 1999 to 9999 or 0 to 9999 0 o ea Control output 2 scaling low limit Same as control output 1 0 E Sb to 5 55 Internal Event 1 to 5 sub setting The decimal point position may vary so that it T50 Control output 2 scaling high limit Same as control output 1 1000 ECHI o ESHI meets the operation
35. PV before ratio bias and filter SP Deviation PV SP CT1 current value CT2 current value MFB Invalid on SDC 15 10 SP MV 11 PV MV 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 e When the object control output is the current output the display and setting can be made e MV scalable bandwidth is used to calculate SP PV and PV MV For details refer to MV scaling range on page 5 68 e If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank is prior to 2 04 SP MV and PV MV cannot be selected 5 66 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Output scaling low limit high limit The output scaling low limit and high limit of the current output can be set Control output 1 scaling low 7 wy u 1999 to 9999 Simple limit Setup setting Setup L The decimal point position may vary so that it Standard bank Control output 1 scaling high 7 we limit Setup setting Setup L lJ bank meets the output type High function Control output 2 scaling low wy limit Setup setting Setup L 14 bank D 1 Control output 2 scaling high o limit Setup setting Setup L bank e When the object control output is the current output the display and setting can be made e The following Figures show the relationship between the numeric value and output of the output type using the output scaling low limit high limit settings Output 110 100 4 5 Input 10 1 4 Input Low limit High limit Hig
36. and MV high limit at AT AT oH and the other is between the MV low limit oL 1 and MV high limit oH 1 of the PID constant When there are no common portions in two ranges the AT function is stopped automatically e When the Heat Cool control is used the MV becomes a value limited by the MV low limit at AT At oL MV high limit at AT At oH the heat MV becomes a value limited by the MV low limit oL 1 MV high limit oH 1 of the PID constant and the cool MV becomes a value limited by the output low limit Cool oL1 C output high limit Cool 0oH1 C of the PID constant e When the MV low limit at AT AT oL high limit AT oH MV low limit oL 1 high limit OH 1 output low limit cool oL1 C high limit cool OH1 C of the PID constant are set unevenly the PV may not be changed up or down even though the MV is changed by the AT In this case the AT is kept continued If this occurs the AT is stopped manually the high limit and low limit of the manipulated variable are set again and the AT is started again e The number of limit cycles and period of time from the AT start to AT end may vary depending on the control subject e The MV ON and OFF are repeated several times during execution of the AT function to perform the limit cycle The OFF operation described here means MV limited by the MV low limit at AT At oL or MV high limit at AT oL The default setting before shipment is 0 Additionally the ON ope
37. e The MV manipulated variable during execution of AT can be limited by the MV low limit at AT At oL and MV high limit at AT AT oH When the Heat Cool control is not used the MV becomes a value limited by both the MV low limit at AT At oL MV high limit at AT At oH and MV low limit oL 1 MV high limit oH 1 of the PID constant When the Heat Cool control is used the MV becomes a value limited by the MV low limit at AT At oL MV high limit at AT At oH the heat MV becomes a value limited by the MV low limit oL 1 MV high limit oH 1 of the PID constant and the cool MV becomes a value limited by the output low limit Cool oL1 C output high limit Cool 0H1 C of the PID constant e The AT type At ty is a setting item that the PID constant of the control characteristics suitable for the system is calculated by the AT Set value immediate response is adjusted to the process that the heater heating directly affects the PV to aim at the adjustment considering the immediate response Set value 2 stability is adjusted to the process that the heater heating indirectly affects the PV to aim at the adjustment considering the stability When compared to the AT functions of Yamatake s conventional models set value immediate response is close to the SDC10 and set value 0 normal is close to the SDC20 21 5 18 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION The following Figure shows the conceptual diagram expressing
38. eee e eee eee eee 1 2 322 Socket part 1 seeeee eee e cece cece eee eeeeeeeees 1 6 igh E E ES i332 E N E T TE E E E 1 3 3 5 SP down ramp seessssssessseeesseresesereeo 5 3 SP high litmitssciseeccavearcssavenannee as 27 5 31 SP high limit Bab ii Sees eae ore ene avatar SP highlow liii ssesceestcasiatecuspauecascs 5 40 OP i icciviesedvanithisreleniiemiatecasusness 5 20 SP leat Laiite vied nes ko teed aw ene suena Set 5 31 SP low liiif sscsrsscescigewevasascenaaweseeees 5 40 SP ramp e eeeee cece cece eee cece eeeeeeee 77 5 31 SP up TAMP e eee e eee eee cece erence ee eeeeeees 5 31 WP siding OE EEA N A ET 5 27 Special OFF setup se sserssresreseerrssssrress 5 47 Special pe ere rsr ri te EERE ERES eae ROR csetcteceseoeemiewsteeeuio eee oieeaciess 4 7 AMEE A nes coro L E E RT S210 ST Self tuning Function ssssssssee e 5 24 ST Self tuning Function eeeeeeeeeeee 5 24 ST hunting settling width eeee 5 17 ST Settle Waits secu isesicgincsescd beudai 5 44 ST Stats isscccarascenisasageans veaksanioetaden 5 25 ST step execution resolution width 5 17 ST step ramp change eeeeeeeee cece eee 5 17 ST step settling width o ccsscnstivesassecasaeis 5 17 Stand alone mounting eseeeeee eee eeee 3 2 Standard type stuvesniiwi xe evewseeeepeseseeseses 70 Station address sue deac0 cha derdadeesadawede 7 1 74 S tOppEer ssssssssssssssesessesesessesoesesesee e Be S
39. even after a change in the SP or an external disturbance This is achieved by monitoring the control target learning its characteristics and automatically calculating control constants Before Using This Unit The protective film is adhered to the front console of this unit to protect the surface After the installation and wiring work has been completed stick a scotch tape to the corner of the console and pull it out in the direction indicated by an arrow to peel off the protective film B Handling Precautions If you attempt to peel off the protective film with your fingernail this might cause damage to the console The Role of This Manual Five different manuals in total are available for the SDC15 Single Loop Controller hereafter referred to as this unit Read appropriate manuals according to your requirements If you do not have a required manual contact Yamatake Corporation or its dealer Additionally you can download necessary manuals from http www yamatake com The user level of this unit can be selected from three levels Simple configuration Standard configuration and High function configuration The functions you can set up only with Simple configuration are described in SDC15 Single Loop Controller User s Manual for Basic Operation CP SP 1147E If more advanced application is needed refer to this manual This manual is intended for personnel who have already read SDC15 Single Lo
40. high limit are initialized E DI Assignment of SP ramp enabled disabled The LSP group selection can be set for internal contacts 1 to 3 using the DI Assignment DI Assignment Internal 0 No function Simple Contacts 1 to 3 Operation 13 SP ramp enabled disabled Standard Assignment bank type 1 to 12 14 to 20 Other functions High function Setup setting DI e Details of SP ramp enabled disabled with internal contact function The following shows the SP ramp enabled disabled setting with the internal contact ON OFF OFF SP ramp enabled ON SP ramp disabled The SP ramp enabled disabled is set for only one internal contact e When the SP ramp is set disabled the SP ramp operation is stopped and the SP value becomes the final SP 5 31 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 8 DI Digital Input and Internal Contact The following shows the functional block diagram of the DI digital input and internal contact Input bit function is not used Input bit function is used Input bit function is not used Input assign Setting Input bit function Setting DI Assignment Input assign A DI1 3 is not used to DI3 3 must be set using DI Assignment DI Assignment Input assign B DI1 4 to DI3 4 DI1 2 to DI3 2 DI Assignment Input assign C DI1 5 to DI3 6 DI Assignment Input assign D DI1 6 to DI3 6 Input assign Polarity Diistatus ON OFF Setting DI Assignment Polarity A to D DI1 7 to DI3 7 Inpu
41. including switches which contain electronic components over a prolonged period may degrade insulation or increase contact resistance and may result in heat generation or any other similar problem causing such product or switch to develop safety hazards such as smoking ignition and electrification Although acceleration of the above situation varies depending on the conditions or environment of use of the products you are required not to use any Yamatake products for a period exceeding ten 10 years unless otherwise stated in specifications or instruction manuals 5 Recommendation for renewal Mechanical components such as relays and switches used for Yamatake products will reach the end of their life due to wear by repetitious open close operations In addition electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors will reach the end of their life due to aged deterioration based on the conditions or environment in which such electronic components are used Although acceleration of the above situation varies depending on the conditions or environment of use the number of open close operations of relays etc as prescribed in specifications or instruction manuals or depending on the design margin of your machine or equipment you are required to renew any Yamatake products every 5 to 10 years unless otherwise specified in specifications or instruction manuals Field instruments sensors such as pressure flow level sensors regulating valves etc
42. mode is the READY mode when contact turned ON Conditions for guarantee soak ramp is completed and operation enters within the deviation of the final SP Input Output port setup Function Function2 Function3 Function4 Internal Contac The timer start is self retained at time up so that Timer start up contact the timer is not restarted due to change in PV DI Assignment Internal Contact 2 Input Output port setup 5 65 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 12 Continuous Output The following shows the functional block diagram of the continuous output Output range type Setting Setup C42 C47 Output type Setting Setup C43 C48 Output scaling high limit low limit Setting C44 C45 C49 to C50 Continuous output current output E Output range The output range of the current output can be set Control output 1 range Y 1 4 to 20mA Simple Setup setting Setup bank 2 0 to 20mA Standard Control output 2 range ue Pign runcHon Setup setting Setup bank C ai e When the object control output is the current output the display and setting can be made Output type The output type of the current output can be set Control output 1 type Ls MV manipulated variable Simple Setup setting Setup bank 44 Heat MV for heat cool control Standard Control output 2 type en MV for heat cool control High function Setup setting Setup bank
43. set data for AL45 47 and adjustment data for ALABIE Replace the unit low limit e ON HYS HYS 4 ON HYS ON HYS Main setting Sub setting py Main setting Sub setting py Deviation high limit O HYS ON ON HYS SP Main setting py SP Main setting py Deviation low limit O ON 4 HYS HYS ON SP Main setting py SP Main setting py Deviation t Hys A ON HYS i ges i f Main setting Sub SP ON HYS ON hem E i N Main setting Sub setting setting SP Spy reference O HYS ON ON HYS SP Main setting py SP Main setting py Deviation low limit Final SP reference QO ON 4 HYS HYS ON SP Main setting py SP Main setting py Deviation gt lt ON Tis 1 l HYS 4 ON St ag et Main setting Sub setting SP 1 Hys 4 ON HYS gt 1 i ea Main setting Sub setting SP PV Tvs PON HYS Main setting Sub setting CT1 at output ON gt OFF before measuring CT1 current value o Main setting Sub setting CT1 at output ON OFF before measuring the CT1 current value O HYS ON ON HYS Main setting CT1 at output OFF OFF before measuring CT1 current value Main setting CT1 at output OFF OFF before measuring CT1 current value ON 4 HYS HYS ON tis ON HYS gt Main sett
44. 0 30H first byte of the read count 0 30H second byte of the read count 0 30H third byte of the read count 2 32H fourth byte of the read count 1 Add the data from the top up to just before the checksum The add operation is as follows OAH 03H 03H E9H 00H 02H The result is FBH 2 The low order byte of the addition result FBH is FBH as is The 2 s complement of FBH is 05H 3 Convert the obtained 05H to a two byte ASCII code The result is 0 30H 5 35H and the two bytes 0 30H and 5 35H are the checksum e CR LF This indicates the end of the message Immediately after LF is received the device immediately stands by for permission to process the received message 8 4 MODBUS RTU Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS All messages are written in binary data A MODBUS RTU message consists of 1 to 3 below The application layer stores commands which are transmission contents from the master station and responses which are transmission contents from the slave station All messages use binary data Each slot below corresponds to one character 1 2 3 1 frame 1 Station address 1 byte 2 Send message response message 3 Checksum 2 bytes e Station address Of the messages sent by the master station the device creates response messages only when station addresses are the same Station addresses in messages are expressed in one
45. 1 0 Operation type 2 LSP group selection 0 2 3 LSP group selection 0 4 4 Invalid 5 Invalid 6 Invalid 7 RUN READY selection 8 AUTO MANUAL selection 9 LSP RSP selection 10 AT Stop Start 11 ST disabled enabled 12 Control action direct reverse 13 SP Ramp enabled disabled 14 PV Hold 15 PV Maximum value hold 16 PV Minimum value hold 17 Timer Stop Start 18 Release all DO latches Continue Release 19 Invalid 20 Invalid at 4 2 tod 3 2 Internal contact 1 to 3 0 Not used Default input 0 Input bit function 1 Function 1 A and B or C and D 2 Function 2 A or B and C or D 3 Function 3 A or B or C or D 4 Function 4 A and B and C and D a 4 3 toa 3 3 Internal contact 1 to 3 0 Normally opened 1 Normally closed 2 Contact 1 Input assign A 2 D1 3 DI2 4 to 9 Undefined 3 Contact 2 10 to 14 Internal Event 1to 5 4 Contact 3 di iH to ot 3 4 Internal contact 1 to 3 15 to 17 Undefined 0 Input assign B 18 to 21 Communication DI1 to 4 di 5 to di 3 5 Internal contact 1 to 3 22 MANUAL 23 READY 24 Undefined 0 Input assign C 25 AT running 26 During SP ramp 27 Undefined d 4 8 tod 3 6 Internal contact 1 to 3 28 Alarm occurs 29 PV alarm occurs 0 Input assign D 30 Undefined 31 mode key pressing status 32 Event output 1 status 33 Control output 1 status ot AT tod 3 7 Internal contact 1 to 3 The digits are determined to 1st 2nd 3rd Polarity A to D and 4th digit from the righ
46. 1 Operation type 5801 16A9 22185 569 Internal Event 1 Direct Reverse 5802 16a 22186 56a Internal Event 1 Standby 5803 16aB 22187 seaB Internal Event 1 state at READY 5804 16ac 22188 seac Reserved for future extension 5805 16AD 22189 seaD a imei le ES m o O ES Internal Event 1 Controller alarm OR 5806 16AE 22190 56AE Internal Event 1 Special OFF setup 5807 16AF 22191 56AF Internal Event 1 Delay unit 5808 16B0 22192 56B0 Reserved for future extension 5809 16B1 22193 56B1 Internal Event 2 Operation type 5810 16B2 22194 56B2 Internal Event 2 Direct Reverse 5811 16B3 22195 56B3 Internal Event 2 Standby 5812 16B4 22196 56B4 Internal Event 2 state at READY 5813 16B5 22197 56B5 Reserved for future extension 5814 16B6 22198 56B6 Internal Event 2 Controller alarm OR 5815 16B7 22199 56B7 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bank Item name RAM address Decimal EEPROM address EEPROM Decimal point Remarks information Configuration Internal Event 2 Delay unit Reserved for future extension Internal Event 3 Operation type Internal Event 3 Direct Reverse Internal Event 3 Standby Internal Event 3 state at READY Reserved for future extension Internal Event 3 Controller alarm OR 5824 16CO 22208 Internal Event 3 Special OFF setup 5825 16C1 22209 Internal Event 3 Delay unit Reserved for future extensio
47. 10 Internal Event 1 11 Internal Event 2 12 Internal Event 3 13 Internal Event 4 Internal Contact 1 Input 14 Internal Event 5 assign C A 15 to 17 Undefined eae aes Communication DIZ i i ASSIgNmENt pAn Communication DI3 Internal Contact 1 Input Communication D14 assign D i MANUAL mode Setup setting DI READY mode Assignment bank Undefined AT running Internal Contact 2 Input During SP ramp assign A Undefined Setup setting DI Alarm occurs Assignment bank PV alarm occurs Undefined mode key pressing status Event output 1 status Control output 1 status Internal Contact 1 Input assign B Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 2 Input assign B Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 2 Input assign C Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 2 Input assign D Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 3 Input assign A Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 3 Input assign B Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 3 Input assign C Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 3 Input assign D Setup setting DI Assignment bank e When the input bit function of the same internal contact No is set for input bit functions 1 to 4 the display and setting can be made 5 35 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Polarity of input assign The polarity of four input
48. 110 0 0 1 to 999 9 Simple Standard High function 0 to 9999s No integration control action when set at 0 0 to 9999s No derivative control action when set at 0 10 0 to 110 0 Standard High function 10 0 to 110 0 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION e When the control method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 the display and setting can be made e Cool related items can be displayed and set when using the Heat Cool control C26 1 e When the I Integral time I 1 is set at Os or I Integral time cool I 1 C is set at Os in the Heat Cool control no integration control action is performed The Manual reset rE 1 can be used in both the heat and cool controls e Parameter settings for the cool control are displayed only when the Heat Cool control is set enabled e The Manual reset rE 1 is displayed when the set value of either the I Integral time heat or cool becomes 0 e The Manual reset rE 1 is commonly used for both the heat and cool controls e When the I Integral time heat or cool is Os the operation is processed with both I Integral time heat and cool set at Os Heat Cool control The Heat Cool control related items such as Heat Cool Heat Cool control dead zone and Heat Cool change point can be set Heat Cool Z7 0 Normal Standard Setup setting Setup bank L eb 4 Energy saving High function Heat Cool
49. 3A 0 0 to 58 3A 0 1 to 1 0A 0 1 to 4 1A 0 1 to 8 3A 0 2 to 16 6A 0 4 to 41 6A e If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank rsz is prior to version 2 04 the operation is always performed on the basis of 800 CT turns and one CT power wire loop The number of CT1 CT2 turns and power wire loops is not displayed and cannot be set O Z e If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank i is prior to version 2 04 the CT input failure alarm AL11 is not displayed Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 14 Console Display and Key Operation It is possible to make the setting so that the console display and key operation are customized E Key operation type Two kinds of general key operation flows are provided standard key operation type and special key operation type A desired key operation type can be selected For details about two kinds of key operation types gt Key Operation on page 2 2 Key operation type I 7 4 0 Standard type 0 High function Setup setting Setup bank amp ae 1 Special type E mode key function The selection operation when the mode key is kept pressed for 1 sec or longer in the operation display mode can be set mode key function Invalid Simple Setup setting Setup bank AUTO MANUAL selection Standard RUN READY selection High function AT Stop Start LSP group selection Release all DO latches Invalid Communication DI1 selection In
50. 5 74 E PV SP display Setup 5 0 sscsereccecaeeveeete ere cieesnecuueones 5 75 E MV display Setup ee eee cece cece cece cece e cence eee e eee eeenees 5 76 E EV display setup ee Tee ee ee seeagennes 5 77 E Timer remain time display Setup 0 cececeeeececeeeecnces 5 77 mM CT display setup P T E TTT E ET 5 78 E Userleval sirsisrosierreriieo ri irana raa a A 5 78 E Communication monitor display sesessesesesseserereerseeee 5 78 E User Function ick sisicecdiccisccccsaec aia cdcecua sane ote engeewe ee mawen s 5 79 E Key lock communication lock and loader lock 5 83 E PaSSwOrd cccctissciessicciasse eviews ssndtenqirdacawetoawsasiaanwnagn 5 84 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA 6 1 List of Operation Displays lt lt 5 0 s0 lt 2 sc lt seesencemre ane ceeesnecunes 6 1 M Operation displayS cece cece cece cece cece reece eee eeeeeceeees 6 1 6 2 List of Parameter Setting Displays EEE T 6 3 E Mode Dank 144520heseccssiesdedientceecandeas E SE 6 3 SP aries E T E E E 6 3 E Event bank irisicissirrecsaisnuasiss Jsddnsspscriss E E E 6 4 E PID Dan lt lt iccccsccansadecs piadsineontendataecesscatetseoeeteaacaw nada s 6 5 E Paraivieter Bal is6ii050505ids iccissaciewiaseskGeiearecincsaedsear bas eva 6 6 E Extended tuning baths sisiesccissadsassvisieisciinievwirissaieeeees 6 7 6 3 List of Setup Setting Displays
51. Branching according to Heat Cool control Setting Setup C26 Output at READY Heat Cool control Setting Setup C17 C18 Setting Setup C28 C29 MV1 Heat MV MV2 Cool MV MV1 Heat MV MV2 Cool MV Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Control method A desired control method can be selected from three kinds of control methods Control method 0 ON OFF control Simple Parameter 1 Fixed PID Standard setting Parameter bank 2 ST Self tuning High function e When the control output type is relay RO the initial value becomes 0 The initial value is 1 in other cases e Fixed of 1 Fixed PID means that the PID constant is not changed automatically since the ST is not run However the AT can be run even in the fixed PID control e When using the Heat Cool control C26 1 or when using the Just FiTTER control JF ov gt 0 the ST is not run even though 2 ST is set e The following Table shows valid and invalid functions related to 1 Fixed PID and 2 ST as well as other related parameters Classification of Classification Classification of RationaLOOP AT ST Just FiT TER Heat Cool control of RationaLOOP control action function x RationaLOOP Heat Cool control Normal PID x Xx o o lx Ol x olx olx O lt x olx O lt x O x RationaLOOP Related settings Control algorithm Adjustment result be comes the PID control AT type ST step execution Just F
52. CJ Handling Precautions e Even though the AUTO MANUAL display is set at Displayed the AUTO MANUAL is not displayed when CtrL Control method is set at 0 ON OFF control e Even though the AT stop start display is set at Displayed the AT stop start is not displayed when CtrL Control method is set at O ON OFF control 5 74 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E PV SP display setup Whether or not the PV SV value related items are displayed in the operation display mode can be set PV SP display setup Whether or not the PV SP value related items Standard Setup setting Setup bank i 71 are displayed in the operation display mode is High function determined by the sum of the following weights Bit 0 PV display Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Bit 1 SP display Disabled 0 Enabled 2 Bit 2 LSP group number display Disabled 0 Enabled 4 Other invalid settings 0 8 PV display SP display LSP group number display Undefined e When using the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 not only the numeric value but also the bit input can be used to set PV SP display setup C74 CJ Handling Precautions e Even though the LSP group number display is set at Enabled the LSP group number is not displayed when C30 LSP system group is set at 1 5 75 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E MV display setup Whether or not the MV related items are displayed in the operation d
53. DO Assignment Ot1 1 assign A to D Ot1 2 to Ot2 6 Ev1 2 Control output MV2 Ot2 1 Ev1 1 Ev2 1 Ev3 1 to Ev3 6 Event output 1 Internal Event 1 Event output 2 Internal Event 2 Event output 3 Internal Event 3 Output bit function Function 1 to 4 Setting DO Assignment Operation type Ot1 1 to Ot2 1 Ev1 1 to Ev3 1 Polarity of output bit function Setting DO Assignment Polarity Ot1 7 to Ot2 7 Ev1 7 to Ev3 7 Output latch Setting DO Assignment Latch Ot1 8 to Ot2 8 Ev1 8 to Ev3 8 Control outputs 1 to 2 Event outputs 1 to 3 5 51 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E MV1 MV2 process The Time proportional cycle and time proportional cycle mode of MV1 MV2 can be set Time proportional cycle 1 ro 5 to 120s Output includes the relay output 10 or 2s Simple For MV1 to 1 to 120s Output does not include the relay Standard Parameter output High function setting Parameter bank Time proportional cycle 2 10 or 2s For MV2 Parameter setting Parameter bank Time proportional cycle L OL i 0 Controllability aiming type Oor1 High function mode cree 1 Operation service life aiming type ON OFF Parameter operation is performed only once within the setting Parameter bank Time proportional cycle e MV1 is a general name of the ON OFF control output time proportional output and time proportional output heat of the Heat Cool control MV is the time proportional output cool of the Heat C
54. Event 2 sub setting Instrument information Internal Event 2 remain time Internal Event 3 main setting Internal Event 3 sub setting Internal Event 3 remain time Lock bank User Function Utilization Communication lock 5 83 User Function 1 User Function 2 Password 1B 5 84 User Function 3 Password 2B 5 84 Instrument information bank User Function 4 ROM ID 6 19 ROM version 1 6 19 User Function 5 User Function 6 Manufacturing date code month day 6 19 Serial No 6 19 User Function 7 Note The figures shown on the right of the display and setting columns in the tree structure indicate the relevant pages User Function 8 2 4 Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS Display when the power is turned ON pe Off The mode indicators are lit sequentially from the left during a period of 6 sec after the power has been turned ON while both Off the upper display and lower display are off When all mode indicators have been lit the O00 10 Oro 0 ae The mode indicator display is changed to the operation display is lit sequentially lt vA from the left No ki tion f in No key operation for 3 min or more ome a lonor amin Press the mode key Keep the para Press the mode key pressed for 2 sec or longer i Press the lt key Operation display Bank selection gt Bank setting display PV SP display Press the para key
55. IF Example in case of normal reception 1 Start of message Station address Read command Data count X 2 Read data 1 Read data 2 Checksum LRC Delimiter 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 revere re rl aS 8 7 8 8 Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS e Example in case of error fo ave l4fo 1 7 1 cr 1 5 1 Start of message 2 Station address 3 Error flag Since undefined 04 is sent as a command with a send message the most significant bit is turned ON and sent back as 84 4 Abnormal termination code KF page 8 6 5 Checksum LRC 6 Delimiter MODBUS RTU e Example in case of normal reception molol o 6 6 1 Station address 2 Read command 3 Read count X 2 bytes 4 Read data 1 5 Read data 2 6 Checksum CRC e Example in case of error M1Al l 1 Station address 2 Error flag Since undefined 04H is sent as a command with a send message the most significant bit is turned ON and sent back as 84H 3 Abnormal termination code gt page 8 6 4 Checksum CRC Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Write command 10H Send Message This is a command capable of writing the contents of continuous data addresses from a specified write start data address with a single message The following is an example of send message while writing data Example Writing 01A0H and OE53H in the continuous data addresses consisting of 2 words
56. Internal Event 2 Hysteresis Internal Event 2 ON delay time Internal Event 2 OFF delay time Internal Event 3 main setting Internal Event 3 sub setting Internal Event 3 Hysteresis Internal Event 3 ON delay time Internal Event 3 OFF delay time Internal Event 4 main setting Internal Event 4 sub setting Internal Event 4 Hysteresis Internal Event 4 ON delay time Internal Event 4 OFF delay time 7005 1B5D 23389 7009 1B61 23393 7013 1B65 23397 1B69 23401 1D4D 23885 7502 1D4E 23886 7506 1D52 23890 7507 1D53 23891 7511 1D57 23895 7512 1D58 23896 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 7019 7020 7501 sis ross seo soe 7516 1D5c 23900 5D5C Rane 7517 1D5D 23901 5D5D P ff asia rose ane soe J aya oa ola wo 5B5B 5B5C 5B5D S Same as RAM address 13312 decimal 5B5E 5B5F 5B60 5B61 Same as RAM address 13313 decimal 5B62 5B63 5B64 5B65 Same as RAM address 13314 decimal 5B66 5B6 5B6 5B69 jN Same as RAM address 13315 decimal 5B6A 5B6B 5B6 5D4D y Same as RAM address 13056 decimal 5D4E Same as RAM address 13057 decimal vaja o K T D50 D51 D52 vj a Same as RAM address 13058 decimal 5D5 Same as RAM address 13059 decimal D5 D5 D5 D57 a Same as RAM address 13060 decimal Same as RAM address 13061 decimal 5D5 5D5 5D5A Same as RAM address 13062 dec
57. READY mode when the s a f X Ly PV SP is shown on the operation display the mie AEA character string rUn on the display No 2 starts flashing l 2 When the mode key is kept pressed for 1 sec or ee longer the READY mode is changed to the RUN fa f mode and the flashing of the character string rUn is stopped 3 When pressing of the mode key is stopped the display is returned to the PV SP display 7 im Lt ze roe C LALI C Handling Precautions e If the MODE key function of the setup setting is set disabled C72 0 or if the set selection operation is invalid the selection operation cannot be performed using the mode key e When pressing the mode key on the parameter setting display or setup setting display instead of the operation display the display is returned to the operation display However even though the mode key is kept pressed continually the selection operation cannot be performed In this case stop pressing the key once and then press the mode key 2 7 Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS E User level 2 8 The user level of this unit can be selected from three levels Simple configuration Standard configuration and High function configuration using the user level of the setup setting C79 gt Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA C Handling Precautions Even though the user level is changed the functions other than setting display canno
58. RTD input and e DC voltage input Allowable input voltage wore added End of book Terms and Conditions added date June 2011 CP SP 1148E 10th Edition jiii 4 1 Warning was changed Note added to Setup bank table Descriptions added to wiring precautions Table and diagrams of crimp type terminal lugs were changed An item was added to Handling Precautions Descriptions added to SP up ramp down ramp Description added to the specifications Terms and Conditions We would like to express our appreciation for your purchase and use of Yamatake products You are required to acknowledge and agree upon the following terms and conditions for your purchase of Yamatake products field instruments control valves and control products unless otherwise stated in any separate document including without limitation estimation sheets written agreements catalogs specifications and instruction manuals 1 Warranty period and warranty scope 1 1 Warranty period Yamatake products shall be warranted for one 1 year from the date of your purchase of the said products or the delivery of the said products to a place designated by you 1 2 Warranty scope In the event that Yamatake product has any failure attributable to Yamatake during the aforementioned warranty period Yamatake shall without charge deliver a replacement for the said product to the place where you purchased or repair the said product and deliver it to the aforementioned plac
59. Same as Control output 1 Polarity A 0000 2 Polarity A to D to D 1st digit Polarity A The following setting applies to each 2nd digit Polarity B digit 3rd digit Polarity C 0 Direct 4th digit Polarity D 1 Reverse Event output 1 0 Direct pe eRe Event output 1 0 None Latch 1 Latch Latch at ON 2 Latch Latch at OFF except for initialization at power ON Event output 2 Same as Control output 1 Operation Displayed when the optional Operation type type model has Event output 2 0 Default output When using Event output 2 1 MV1 the default output is Internal 2 MV2 Event 2 3 to 6 Function 1 to 4 Euge Event output 2 Same as Control output 1 Output Displayed when the optional Output assign A assign A to D model has Event output 2 0 to 49 and the operation type of Event output 2 Event output 2 is function 1 Output assign B to 4 Ev2 1 gt 2 Z Event output 2 Z 5 Event output 2 Output assign p Z Event output 2 Same as Control output 1 Polarity A Polarity A to D to D 1st digit Polarity A The following setting applies to each 2nd digit Polarity B digit 3rd digit Polarity C 0 Direct 4th digit Polarity D 1 Reverse Event output 2 0 None Latch 1 Latch Latch at ON 2 Latch Latch at Ort except for initialization at power ON 6 21 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Event output 3 Same as Control output 1 Operation Displaye
60. Sensor Range Range C04 initial value C01 Sensor Range Range C04 C04 C04 initial value set value type Celsius Fahrenheit ee an when C01 settings fset value type Celsius Fahrenheit display range jwhen C01 settings pi Kf ene 200 to 200 to 1200 C C 300 to 2200 F Not setting Not setting No decimal point 200 0 to 500 0 C pao OEY flotseting No decimal point 0 to 1200 C o 2200 F i Te decimal point A 00 _ 200 0 to 500 0 C 300 to 900 F Not setting No decimal point 0 0 to 800 0 C 500 F ing No decimal point 200 0 to 200 0 C 300 to 400 F Not setting No decimal point 0 0 to 600 0 C 100 F ing No decimal point Pt100 200 0 to 200 0 C 300 to 400 F Not setting No decimal point 0 0 0 i ing No decimal point 100 0 to 300 0 C 150 to 500 F Not setting No decimal point 200 0 0 C j ing No decimal point 100 0 to 300 0 C 150 to 500 F 0 0 to 800 0 C y ing No decimal point 50 0 to 200 0 C 50 to 400 F 0 0 to 600 0 C i ing No decimal point 50 0 to 200 0 C 50 to 400 F 700 F ing No decimal point 50 0 to 100 0 C 50 to 200 F 100 F ing No decimal point 50 0 to 100 0 C 50to 200 F 0to1 ing No decimal point 0 0 to 200 0 C 0 to 400 F Otoi 0 to 1600 C o 3000 F ing No decimal point 0 0 to 200 0 C Oto 400 F lt Oto1 0 to 1600 C o 3000 F ing No decimal point 0 0 to 500 0 C 0to 900 F
61. Termination Codes on page 7 14 1 Termination code 2 Data delimiter 3 Data 4 Data 2 to n 1 5 Data n Up to 16 words for both RAM and EEPROM area Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Continuous data write command WS command This command writes data to continuous addresses Send message The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the send message for the data write command 1 Write command 2 Data delimiter 3 Start write word address 4 Write data first word 5 Write data second word Response message The figure below shows the structure of the application layer of the response message for the data write command e Normal termination 0 0 1 e Abnormal termination or warning The abnormal termination code is entered at XX 1 gt List of Termination Codes on page 7 14 1 Termination code Maximum read data count per message Up to 16 words for both RAM and EEPROM areas 7 7 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Fixed length continuous data read command RD command This command reads continuous data in two byte units This command is suitable for handling data in ladder programs sent by PLC communications as the data is of a fixed length The start data address is expressed as four hexadecimal digits The data count is expressed as four digits and data is expressed as four X n n is a positive integer hexadecimal digits Send
62. User Function bank User Function 6 Setup setting User Function bank User Function 7 Setup setting User Function bank User Function 8 Setup setting User Function bank Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Up to eight selected settings can be added to the operation display User Function 1 Setup setting User Function bank Each setting is set on the upper display Standard The following High function Not registered Proportional band of currently used PID group Integral time of currently used PID group Derivative time of currently used PID group Manual reset of currently used PID group Output low limit of currently used PID group Output high limit of currently used PID group Proportional band for cool side of currently used PID group Integration time for cool side of currently used PID group Derivative time for cool side of currently used PID group Output low limit for cool side of currently used PID group Output high limit for cool side of currently used PID group e Only settings which can be displayed can be registered For example manual reset of the PID constant can be registered only if integral time I is set at 0 e Setting cannot be made from the console by using a parameter number displayed on the setup screen of the PC loader program SLP C35 e The following keys can be used to select a parameter to be set lt key Moves to the top p
63. action Reverse action of operation type Loop diagnosis 1 The event is turned ON when any change in PV corresponding to increase decrease in MV Manipulated variable is not observed This event is used to detect any fault at the operation end Setting items e Main setting MV Manipulated variable e Sub setting PV e ON delay time Diagnosis time Operation specifications The event is turned ON when the value does not reach the PV set in the sub setting within the diagnosis time ON delay time conditions 1 even though the MV exceeding the main setting is held conditions 2 CAUTION When setting the ON delay it is necessary to put in High function configuration The default setting of the ON delay before shipment is 0 0s Heat control Cool control t t PV PV Area satisfying conditions 1 Sub setting Sub setting Area satisfying i conditions 1 Area satisfying i Area satisfying conditions T conditions Main setting 7 Main setting Conditions 3 Conditions 3 ON delay ON delay set time ON set time On oS Time Time ON delay is started when conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied ON delay is started when conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied When the event type is CT 1 2 heater burnout over current or CT1 2 heater short circuit the status becomes that the event judgment cannot be made from the time of power ON until that CT input current value i
64. address 14337 decimal Bit 0 Control output 1 Bit 1 Control output 2 Bit 2 Event output 1 Bit 3 Event output 2 Bit 4 Event output 3 Bits 5 to 15 Undefined DI status 9206 23F6 25590 63F6 X X Same as RAM address 14338 decimal Bit 0 D11 Bit 1 DI2 Bits 3 to 15 Undefined Communication DI DI1 to 4 9207 23F7 25591 63F7 Bit 0 Communication Bit 1 Communication Bit 2 Communication Bit 3 Communication D14 T Communication DI1 9208 Bit0 Communication Dit Communication Di sooo zaro ass esr O _ 8t0 Commucaton oe Gommuricaton DB amo ara asoa core Seo Communicator Communicator OM een ee asses ore t0 Conmuncaton ow S e ed ee ee be made with the console eoe ease e ose Sanasatom eos er oscar esr Saneasatoe eoa ease s ose Sanoasatom eos ease aseo sso O Saneasatoe eos eas so asa Samoasato eor ease ascor ows Saneasatoe soos 20 oo Sameaabow sooo 20 exe __ Samewaow so mse a owe Seneasatow 9311 245r 25695 eas Sameasabove 9 10 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bank Item name RAM address EEPROM address EEPROM Decimal point ens Instrument status 1 Instrument status 2 fal il a e be made with the console
65. as shown in the following tree structure Operation display Setup PV and SP AUTO MANUAL PV input range type LSP group selection RUN READY Temperature unit MV AT stop start Heat MV Release all DO latches User level 5 78 Cool MV Communication DI 1 Communication monitor display _ 5 78 AT progress CT input 1 current value Event configuration CT input 2 current value LSP1 group SP Internal Event 1 Configuration 1 Internal Event 1 main setting LSP2 group SP Internal Event 1 sub setting LSP3 group SP Internal Event 1 remain time LSP4 group SP Internal Event 5 Configuration 2 5 46 Internal Event 2 main setting Internal Event 5 Configuration 3 5 47 Internal Event 2 sub setting Internal Event 2 remain time Internal Event 1 main setting DI Assignment Internal Event 3 main setting Internal Event 1 sub setting Internal Contact 1 Operation type 5 33 Internal Contact 1 Input bit function 5 34 Internal Event 3 sub setting Internal Event 1 hysteresis Internal Event 3 remain time Internal Event 5 ON delay Internal Event 5 OFF delay PID I Integral time D Derivative time Manual reset 5 45 5 46 Internal Contact 3 Polarity 5 36 Internal Contact 3 Internal Event channel def 5 34 DO Assignment 5 14 5 53 5 14 5 54 5 14 5 14 Event output 3 Polarity 5 57 Event output 3 Latch 5 57
66. assigns A B C D used for the input bit function can be set Internal Contact 1 Polarity gd i 7 The digits are called 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd High function A to D Setup setting DI 4 I digit and 4th digit from the right end Assignment bank 1st digit Input assign A Polarity setting 2nd digit Input assign B Polarity setting Internal Contact 2 Polarity 1 7 3rd digit Input assign C Polarity setting A to D Setup setting DI 4th digit Input assign D Polarity setting Assignment bank Internal Contact 3 Polarity 0 Direct A to D Setup setting DI 1 Reverse Assignment bank e When the input bit function of the same internal contact No is set for input bit functions 1 to 4 the display and setting can be made E Polarity of input bit function The polarity after the input bit function functions 1 to 4 can be set Internal Contact 1 Polarity 0 Direct High function Setup setting DI 1 Reverse Assignment bank Internal Contact 2 Polarity Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 3 Polarity Setup setting DI Assignment bank 5 36 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E DI Assignment setting with Smart Loader Package SLP C35 When setting DI Assignment with the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 select Edit E Input port setup O in that order from the Input menu The input bit function input assign polarity of input assign and polarity of input bit funct
67. bank Internal Event 3 Main setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 3 Sub setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 3 Hysteresis Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 4 Main setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 4 Sub setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 4 Hysteresis Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 5 Main setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 5 Sub setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 5 Hysteresis Parameter setting Event bank 5 48 1999 to 9999 The decimal point position may vary so that it meets the operation type The above value becomes 0 to 9999 in some operation types 1999 to 9999 The decimal point position may vary so that it meets the operation type The above value becomes 0 to 9999 in some operation types 0 to 9999 The decimal point position may vary so that it meets the operation type Same as Internal Event 1 Main setting Same as Internal Event 1 Sub setting Same as Internal Event 1 Hysteresis Same as Internal Event 1 Main setting Same as Internal Event 1 Sub setting Same as Internal Event 1 Hysteresis Same as Internal Event 1 Main setting Same as Internal Event 1 Sub setting Same as Internal Event 1 Hysteresis Same as Internal Event 1 Main setting Same as Internal Event 1 Sub setting Same as Internal Event 1 Hysteresis Simple
68. be made PV square root extraction m 1a 0 0 Square root extraction is not performed 0 0 High function dropout 0 1 to 100 0 Setup setting Setup bank e Details of PV square root extraction The calculation input in and the calculation result in are expressed as PVin and PVout respectively When the PV input is the PV square root extraction dropout set value or more and less than 100 0 the control formula becomes as shown below PVout vPVin 100 X 100 When the PV input is larger than 0 0 and smaller than the PV square root extraction dropout set value PVout 0 0 When the PV input is 0 0 or less or 100 0 or more the square root extraction is not performed Therefore PVout PVin 5 3 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Output after PV square root extraction PVout A 100 FS H zz5 Y Xin 100 X100 Too FS Pvin Dropout value variable change from 0 1 to 100 0 E Decimal point position When the PV input type is L DC voltage DC current or when the PV input type is a part of the PV input range type of R RTD the decimal point position of the PV input can be set Decimal point position 0 No decimal point Simple Setup setting Setup bank 1 1 digit below decimal point Standard 2 2 digits below decimal point High function 3 3 digits below decimal point CJ Handling Precautions e As this setting is changed the decimal point position of the
69. bit function The image of Select four output Select whether or not the polarity of the ladder is changed according to the assigns A to D the bit function is made selected output bit function Function Function2 Function3 juraion A 2 Internal Event 1 1 Normally closed norma OUTI ita 1B Yes on latch f ric 1D h 3 Internal Event 2 1 Normally closed normally on 1 Cc OK Cancel Select whether or not the polarity is set for Select the latch of the output status assigns A to D C Handling Precautions In addition to the selection through the menu the Input port setup window can also be opened using the following procedures Click the input output port setup icon i Right click in the input bit function setting window Press the Ctrl and P keys at the same time 5 11 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Application Examples This section describes examples of applications using the assign functions of this unit Examples of applications using assign functions The following shows setting examples with the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 To use assign functions it is absolutely necessary to set the user level to High function configuration Untitled SLP C35 C15TROTAOOXX File Edit Display Communication Setup User Function option HE Setup Range HE Setup Ctrl HE Setup SP HE Setup
70. byte The station address is set up by the station address setup setup setting C65 However when the station address is set to 0 the device creates no response even if station addresses match The device returns the same station address as that received as the response message e Checksum CRC This value is for checking whether or not some abnormality e g noise causes the message content to change during communications The checksum is expressed as2 bytes The checksum CRC creation method is shown below CRC calculation Input unsigned char length Number of transmission bytes unsigned char top Transmission data start pointer Output unsigned short CRC CRC calculation result unsigned short crc16 unsigned char length unsigned char top unsigned short CRC Oxffff unsigned short next unsigned short carry unsigned short n unsigned char crel while length next unsigned short top CRC next for n 0 n lt 8 n carry CRC amp 1 CRC gt gt 1 if carry CRC 0xA001 top crcl CRC amp Oxff00 gt gt 8 CRC lt lt 8 CRC crcl return CRC Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Command type e frame end judgment A message end 1 frame end is determined when a time period specified for each transmission speed has passed during which no character is received It is considered that 1 frame has ended when the ne
71. differences in control result using the PID constant calculated by each AT type PV AT type 1 Immediate response SP AT type 0 Normal ne AT type 2 Stable Time Difference in PV change when SP is changed e For the AT Proportional band adjust At P AT Integral time adjust At I and AT Derivative time adjust At d the value that the PID constant calculated by the AT is multiplied by each coefficient is written into the set value of the PID constant However the coefficient must be a value in the PID constant setting range Note e Setting that the AT is activated for only the heat PID constant in the Heat Cool control 50 0 lt MV low limit at AT At oL lt MV high limit at AT At oH e Setting that the AT is activated for only the cool PID constant in the Heat Cool control MV low limit at AT At oL lt MV high limit at AT At oH lt 50 0 gt AT stop start on page 5 8 and AT function on page 5 21 5 19 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Just FiTTER This Just FiTTER function provides the effect of the overshoot suppression and the following items can be set Just FiTTER overshoot 0 to 100 Standard limit restraint control E No JF function when set at 0 High function coefficient Parameter setup Extended tuning bank Just FiTTER settling band JF 0 00 to 10 00 0 30 High function Parameter setup Extended k tuning bank e When the contro
72. display 5004 138C 21388 538 Password 1A x x x lt a EST Information D Manufacturing date code year Christian year 200 Example Year of 2003 is expressed as 3 Manufacturing date code month day Month Day 100 Example Dec 1st is expressed as 12 01 Serial No gt When the communication lock exists the error response is sent O Communication and loader cannot read and write the password Same as above Password 2A Password 1B Same as above Password 2B Same as above User User Function 1 5101 53ED Function User Function 2 5102 53E User Function 3 5103 53E User Function 4 5104 53F User Function 5 5105 53F1 User Function 6 5106 53F User Function 7 5107 53F3 User Function 8 5108 53F PV input range type 5201 5451 Temperature unit 5202 5452 Cold junction compensation T C 5203 5453 Decimal point position 5204 5454 m o M A 9 1 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Setup PV input range low limit 5205 1455 21589 5455 x PV input range high limit 5456 PV square root extraction dropout Reserved for future extension xX Reserved for future extension x Reserved for future extension 5212 x Reserved for future extension 5213 x Control action Direct Reverse 5214 Output operation at PV alarm 5215 Output at PV alarm 5216 Output at READY Heat 5217 Output at READY Cool 5218 E
73. e cence en eneees 5 17 E AT AWMOANING sscsessevscoinoniedsasecsseeiadeswesiiers ee 5 18 E Just FiTTER tek E E E E TE 5 20 E RationaLOOP iscsiscssciccissasnesdeciencives pedsscsaraiesseieeneies 5 20 E SP lag oiscicisscsisssoinssmscss A E A TT dssrnesisa 5 20 5 4 AT auto tuning Function er ee 5 21 E Starting procedures J PMLA PRAEAERAGE RIOR RRERAEEREE ROS 5 21 M Stopping procedures scecesescececescscscncescncecsscnceees 5 21 viii 5 5 ST Self tuning Function etnies TETT E ee ee 5 24 M Starting procedures ccsecccsesccncsccrescccuscecesesensceens 5 24 E Stopping Procedures cissisccscssscdinsiscdsasviosseadcessavninssvenns 5 25 5 6 Precautions for ST Self tuning ceeceeceececceceeceeceeeeeees 5 26 T OP ae ee ee ek ee RET Re eT new CRT Te ee eee re rT PE ane 5 27 E SP setup in operation display MOGE ssiccccisckiesasapesiccasecenoaxs 5 28 HM LSP system group eee cece cece eee cece cece cece ence cee eeences 5 28 E LSPito4 PPE N EAO EETA E IE TRTE 5 28 E LSP group number sssessesesessecesecseceseesecsecoerecsseeceress 5 28 E DI Assignment of LSP group selection essssssessessesses pissi 5 29 E SP tatip GH Hsissiiismtnieniccemii ieee aeara 5 30 E SP up rampMown ramp 6s 6s cece ccsscscassacsccseanecessossnaeerees 5 30 E SP low limithigh limit 22 0 00 000 c0sse ve scane rene se scumcewe 5 31 E DI Assignment of SP ramp enab
74. engaged with the groove of the main body 4 Tighten the upper and lower screws of the mounting bracket For waterproof mounting The panel mounting type C15T can be waterproof mounted To do so attach the accessory gasket to the main body before above step 1 After that mount the main body with the gasket attached from above operation step 1 in order C Handling Precautions To fasten this controller onto the panel tighten a mounting bracket screws and turn one more half turn when there is no play between the bracket and panel Excessively tightening the screws may deform the controller case 3 3 Chapter 3 INSTALLATION C15T Using the hard cover for panel mount type For panel mounting type it is possible to attach the hard cover to the front console Use of hard cover makes it possible to prevent the settings from being changed due to accidental operation or to operate the unit in poor installation environment The display can be seen with the cover kept closed When operating the key raise the cover and operate the key Items to be prepared Hard cover Part No 81446442 001 Optional unit Hard cover Gasket Both gaskets must be used one is supplied with the main body and the other is supplied with the hard cover Both are the same gaskets 1 As shown in the Figure mount the gasket hard cover and gasket on the main body in that order so that the hard cover is sandwiched by two gaskets 2 Inse
75. faulty operation E Installation place Install the controller in the following locations e Common mode voltage for I O excluding the power supply and relay contact output The voltage to the grounding line must be as follows AC 33V r m s or less and 46 7V peak or less DC 70Vdc or less e Not high or low temperature humidity e Free from silicone gas and other corrosive gases such as sulfide gas e Less dust or soot e Appropriately processed locations to prevent direct sunlight wind or rain e Less mechanical vibration and shock e Not close to the high voltage line welding machine or electrical noise generating source e The minimum 15 meters away from the high voltage ignition device for a boiler e Less effect by the magnetic e No flammable liquid or gas 3 1 Chapter 3 INSTALLATION E External dimensions C15T Panel Mount type Unit mm 2 60 Mounting bracket Accessory Temindlscrow 48 n R U ht o A 1 1 ty I co alii 8 ULL I 1 l 1 it ae FD 1 Socket 81446391 001 Optional unit 31 Terminal screw s 48 M3 5 j 51 i SS Pi P E q T Poa ay Sa oan i abil SDC15 2 M4 mounting hole l o H h st oT l H Ge
76. following 1501W O5DDH o 1 1iofois Dipfolo oleo a 4 6 3 MODBUS ASCII 1 Start of message Station address Write command 10H Write start word address 1 Write data count Write data count X 2 Write data 1 Write data 2 Checksum 0 1 CR LF 3 4 lol 7 8 MODBUS RTU 1 Station address Write start word address 1 Write data count Write data count x 2 Write data 1 Write data 2 Checksum 8 9 Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS Response Message A response message corresponding to the command content is returned when the message is correctly received The figure below shows the structure of the response message when the data is written MODBUS ASCII pe Opi i ofo 5 p bD o 0 0 2 0 BICRILF 4 1 Start of message 2 Station address 3 Write command 10H 4 Write start word address 1 5 Write data count 6 Checksum 7 CR 8 LF MODBUS RTU mol o lolo 1 Station address 2 Write command 10H 3 Write start word address 4 Write data count 5 Checksum Note The response message at the time of abnormal termination is the same as that for the read command 8 10 Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 8 4 Specifications Common with CPL Communications Function E Definition of word addresses gt Definition of Word Addresses on page 7 12 E Numeric representation The specifications
77. hexadecimal characters The station address is set up by the station address setup setup setting C65 However when the station address is set to 0 30H 30H the device creates no response even if station addresses match The device returns the same station address as that received as the response message Sub address The SDC15 does not use the sub address For this reason set 00 30H 30H The device returns the same sub address as that received as the response message Device ID code The device sets X 58H or x 78H as the device ID code This code is determined for each device series and other codes cannot be selected The device returns the same device ID code as that received as the response message X 58H is used as the default and x 78H is used for judging the message as the resend message ETX ETX indicates the end of the application layer Checksum This value is for checking whether or not some abnormality e g noise causes the message content to change during communications The checksum is expressed as two hexadecimal characters Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS e How to calculate a checksum 1 Add the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single byte units 2 Take 2 s complement of the low order one byte of the addition result 3 Convert the obtained 2 s complement to a two byte ASCII code The following is a sample checksum calculation Sample message STX 02H 0 30H
78. is not performed when set at 0 0 3 Display example Internal Event 3 remaining Same as Internal Event 1 remaining time cH Control action Direct Reverse 0 Heat control Reverse action 0 Numeric value time 1 Cool control Direct action cs Output operation at PV alarm 0 Control calculation is continued 0 1 Output at PV alarm is output cl s Output at PV alarm 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 Ott Output at READY Heat 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 g Ce Output at READY Cool 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 oe Output operation at changing AUTOMANUAL 0 Bumpless transfer 1 Preset 0 Stet Preset MANUAL value 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 or 50 0 wT 8 ee Initial output pe of FID control 0 Auto 1 Not initialized 2 Initialized 0 ree a Initial output of control 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 or 50 0 Mode bank c25 Heat Cool control 0 Not used _1 Used 0 Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value CET Heat Cool selection 0 Normal 1 Energy saving 0 A A AUTO MANUAL Atko AUTO mode AAA MANUAL mode AUTO tee Heat Cool control dead zone 100 0 to 100 0 0 0 ror RUN READY run RUN mode rae READY mode RUN c29 Heat Cool control change point 10 0 to 110 0 50 0 AE AT stop start RE oF AT stop AE on AT start AT stop EEH LSP system group 1to4 1 do LE Release all DO latches LE on Latch continue LE oF Latch release Latch continue oe SP ramp unit 0 0 1U s 1 0 1U min 2 0 1U h 1 Cdi i Communication DI1 dl oF
79. limit MV high limit In the latter half the MV is changed in a slightly narrow range The following Figure shows an example of the AT execution when the Heat Cool control dead zone is 0 0 Heat Cool control change point is 50 0 MV low limit is 0 0 and MV high limit is 100 0 MV 100 0 50 0 0 0 Heat MV i j i i 100 0 i oe 50 0 gt Teeneial EEERInnteel ERRREEE cee eRe cenoeeel beneean eee 0 0 Cool MV 100 0 50 0 0 0 AT is ranning SP change point 7 C Handling Precautions e Before starting the AT function put the PV input and or operation end heater power etc in the controllable status e When the control method is set at ON OFF control CtrL 0 the AT function cannot be started To operate the AT function set the control method to Fixed PID CtrL 1 or ST CtrL 2 e To start the AT it is absolutely necessary that the operation is in the READY mode and AUTO mode and no PV input errors occur e If the mode is changed to the READY mode or MANUAL mode or if the PV input error or power failure occurs during execution of the AT function the AT function is stopped without changing of the PID constants 5 22 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION e When the Heat Cool control is not used the MV becomes a value limited by both ranges one range is between the MV low limit at AT AT oL
80. mode indicator rdy is off and the operation is in the RUN mode If the indicator rdy is lit and the operation is in the READY mode change the mode to the RUN mode 3 Make sure that the mode indicator man is off and the operation is in the AUTO mode If the indicator man is lit and the operation is in the MANUAL mode change the mode to the AUTO mode 4 Set the control method of the parameter setting to ST CtrL 2 This operation is not needed from the 2nd and subsequent operations 5 Set the SP If the ST is not started since the PV is close to the SP PV SP use the SP value which is greatly different from the PV value 5 24 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Stopping procedures The ST is completed automatically If it is necessary to stop the ST halfway during execution of the ST or not to start the ST during stopping of the ST set the control method of the parameter setting to Fixed PID CtrL 1 Additionally if the mode is changed to the READY mode or MANUAL mode the ST is also stopped Display during execution of ST azbil SDC15 pv se 4 LED sp O O O O rdy man evi ev2 ev3 oti ot2 Eva The LED of the decimal point at the 1st digit right end digit of the display No 1 is flashing while the ST is running When the ST is completed and PID constants are changed this LED goes off 5 25 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5
81. numeric value 9 and alphabetic character Q are also shown in the same manner xiii 215 Quick Reference Gt This guide offers flowchart and list of parameters and operation examples on pages D 1 to D 8 If more detailed information on the SDC15 is needed refer to the text Upper display Indicators during AT Lower display mode key Various indicators rdy man evi ev2 ev3 oti ot2 bE Mode indicators para key gt CD lt VY A lt lt v and A keys o Loader connector bottom panel Upper display This display shows either the PV value or the display value and set value for each displayed item If an alarm is triggered the normal display and alarm code are displayed alternately During auto tuning AT the rightmost decimal point flashes twice repeatedly Lower display This display shows either the SP MV CT or the display value and set value for each displayed item The rightmost decimal point lights up or flashes to show RUN READY mode or communications status depending on the setting Mode indicators rdy Lights when READY RUN mode if not lit man Lights when MANUAL AUTO mode if not lit ev1 ev2 ev3 Lights when event relays are ON oti ot2 Lights when the control output is ON always lit when the current output is used mode key e When this key is pressed and held for more than 1 second in the operation display mode any of
82. oe alarm OR2 Special OFF setup Delay unit Please select the number t Da B User Function 8 EVENT value 1 UF1 O Unreg Fagen tae 9 EVENT valu 2 UF2 O Unreg F oiher 10 Hysteresi D Unreg bars B PID in use E aee O Unreg oo 12 OFF ddlay ti 0 0 0 Unreg O Unreg O Unreg 2 O Unreg cap able Input 4 7 Valid settings 0 to2 RAM Address 5817 EEPROM Address 22201 Note The registered contents can also be checked by selecting Option gt User Function 5 82 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Key lock communication lock and loader lock The setting changing or display can be set disabled using the key lock Key lock I pai All settings are possible Simple Setup setting Lock bank amp aL Mode event operation display SP UF Standard lock manual MV and mode key can be set High function Operation display SP UF lock manual MV and mode key can be set UF lock manual MV and mode key can be set Communication lock m RS 485 communication read write enabled Setup setting Lock bank RS 485 communication read write disabled High function High function The communication can be set disabled using the communication lock and loader lock e When using only the key lock setting key lock objects can be displayed but the Loader lock mo Loader communication read write enabled Setup setting Lock bank L L Loader communication read write disabled
83. off individually convert them to voltage input by adding resistors No 81401325 sold separately to the circuit Current output device 4to20mA E Noise preventive measures 4 10 The power is taken from the single phase instrumental power supply to consider noise preventive measures If the noise from the power supply is large an appropriate insulation transformer is added to the power supply and an appropriate line filter is used Yamatake s line filter model No 81446364 001 If the noise has fast rising edge an appropriate CR filter is used Yamatake s CR filter model No 81446365 001 C Handling Precautions After the noise preventive measures have been taken do not bundle the primary and secondary sides of the insulation transformer together or put them in the same conduit or duct Chapter 4 WIRING 4 2 Recommended Cables Contact the thermocouple wires to the terminals in case of a thermocouple input When a thermocouple is connected to terminals or wiring distance is long connect the wire via a shielded compensating lead wire e For input output other than thermocouples use a JCS 4364 instrument cable or equivalent generally called twisted shielded cable for instrumentation use Recommended twisted shielded cables Fujikura Ltd IPEV S 0 9mm2 X 1P ITEV S 0 9mm2 X 1T Hitachi Cable Co KPEV S 0 9mm2 X 1P 3 conductors KTEV S 0 9mm X 1T e A shielded multiconductor microphone cord
84. parameters related to the decimal point position of the PV input is also changed The decimal point position of the following settings is changed SP setting SP low limit high limit setting SP up ramp down ramp setting Event setting and continuous output setting related to PV Event setting and continuous output setting related to SP Event setting and continuous output setting related to deviation absolute deviation e This setting is not available for thermocouples Note e For the display conditions setting range and initial value of range numbers COT gt PV input range tables on page 5 2 5 4 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E PV input range low limit high limit When the PV input type is L DC voltage DC current the scaling of the PV input can be set PV input range low limit When the PV input type is L the following When the PV input Simple Setup setting Setup bank contents apply type is L the initial Standard 1999 to 9999 no decimal point value is 0 High function 199 9 to 999 9 1 digit after decimal point 19 99 to 99 99 2 digits after decimal point 1 999 to 9 999 3 digits after decimal point ate Shand When the PV input type is T or R the value is 1000 range low limit and high limit values selected using the PV input range type are used PV input range high limit Setup setting Setup bank e When the PV input type is T thermocouple or R RTD the s
85. reece eens 45 51 DIN tail caessiicercnid edschctasscpneeereeaeanes 3 6 DISPOSAL i asesi cxcarintiteniecaeentenwwadne ea 12 1 OC cicmiccsutictasteagnaiesciieine weedidanews 5 51 During AT ssesreresceseccccevereceseeererses 5 44 During SP ramp sseeessseseessseresereresese 5 44 E EV display setup sessssssssrreseereererree 5 77 Event output see eee e cece cece eee renee eens 2 1 PvGitl A L E E E ene 5 38 External dimensions lt s006 iccees scacacnciakas 3 2 External disturbance lt sciacnsccsncncccacaaens 5 26 External resistors rers rrssrereskissisetto rinitis 4 8 F Fixed length continuous data read 7 8 Fixed length continuous data write 7 9 Fixed length random data read ssssssesses 7 10 Fixed length random data write 5 7 11 Piod PUD vssteavecacaseieeiccdeeeieieganecnnd 5 10 Index 1 G Gain adjustment s sesicsrresressrrssersreness 11 3 EE a arti ees eee den enses 3 2 Cas PENE EEE IAEA T ETE ie ie H Hard COVE ds 4s citavaeeieaveroseseeeia een 1 3 3 4 Heat Cool control dead zone eeeeeees 5 15 HeatiCool control ccrrrissrsiirsrsisirore 425 15 Heater burnGtilss desc acanesvisadsaavacsdaasania 5 40 Heater Short CitGiitss 26s02sceectasisewsantes se 5 40 High function configuration s eseeeeeee 2 8 Host GGVice sci ccestasdeesesccoxseeteoesa keene Fal Hysteresis ee ee eee e cece cece cece eee eeeens 5 48 VO Ghethesicescntesctonnidavcu
86. selection 14592 3900 30976 7900 LSP value in use 14593 3901 30977 7901 mi Manual manipulated variable MV 14594 3902 30978 7902 X RUN READY 14595 3903 30979 7903 AUTO MANUAL 14596 3904 30980 7904 AT stop start 14597 3905 30981 7905 ke ee a for future extension 14598 3906 30982 7906 PID group band in use time Derivative time Manual reset Proportional band cool egral time cool D Derivative time cool Reserved for future extension Output low limit Cool Output high limit Cool Same as RAM address 9108 decimal Same as RAM address 9110 decimal Same as RAM address 9111 decimal Same as RAM address 9106 decimal Same as RAM address 9107 decimal Writing is enabled under no DI Assignment conditions Same as RAM address 9103 decimal Same as RAM address 9123 decimal Writing is enabled in the MANUAL mode Same as RAM address 9105 decimal ia Writing is enabled under no DI Assignment conditions Same as RAM address 9002 decimal pt EN EA EA e ES E Es m ae Writing is enabled under no DI Assignment and other conditions Same as RAM address 9001 decimal Writing is enabled under no DI Assignment and other conditions Same as RAM address 9004 decimal Same as RAM address 9003 decimal Ei I 9 12 Chapter 10 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING E Mainte
87. setting Internal Event 3 sub setting Internal Event 3 Hysteresis Internal Event 3 ON delay time Internal Event 3 OFF delay time Internal Event 4 main setting Internal Event 4 sub setting Internal Event 4 Hysteresis Internal Event 4 ON delay time Internal Event 5 OFF delay time Internal Event 5 main setting Internal Event 5 sub setting Internal Event 5 Hysteresis Internal Event 5 ON delay time Internal Event 5 OFF delay time so that it meets the operation type of the internal event The above value becomes 0 to 9999 in some operation types 0 to 9999 The decimal point position may vary so that it meets the operation type of the internal event 0 0 to 999 9 Delay unit is 0 1s 0 to 9999 Delay unit is other than 0 1s Same as Internal Event 1 Same as Internal Event 1 Same as Internal Event 1 Same as Internal Event 1 Internal Event 1 operation type E1 C1 Necessary settings are displayed according to Internal Event 2 operation type E2 C1 Necessary settings are displayed according to Internal Event 3 operation type E3 C1 Necessary settings are displayed according to Internal Event 4 operation type E4 C1 Necessary settings are displayed according to Internal Event 5 operation type E5 C1 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA E PID bank Bank selection F Pa Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks ra level P i P Proportional bana 0
88. since the Mode RUN READY and timer B contact mode is the READY mode when selection contact turned ON Example 3 Simple pattern mode key Explanation When the mode key is pressed the mode is changed to the RUN mode and the PV is started The SP value moves up or down along with the up down ramp set value When the SP value reaches the final SP value and the PV value enters the constant range the counting is started After the T2 time has elapsed the mode is changed to the READY mode 5 63 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 64 Setting example e Event Display Internal Event 1 Internal Event 2 Operation type Ex C1 9 Deviation high low limit 32 Timer Status Final SP reference Standby 0 No standby EVENT state at READY Ex C2 1 EVENT state at READY 0 EVENT state at READY is forcibly turned OFF is continued Alarm OR 0 None Special OFF setup 0 As usual Delay time unit 0 0 1s Event main setting Ex 3 low limit Event sub setting Ex SB 3 high limit Hysteresis 9999 OFF delay Ex OF 0 Note The internal event No is indicated at the mark of x shown in the Display column e DI Assignment DI Assignment Display Internal Contact 1 Internal Contact 2 Operation type 7 RUN READY 17 Timer stop start Input bit function DIx 2 1 Function 1 A and B or 1 Function 1 A and B or C and D C and D Input assign A DIx 3 18 COM DI 1 10 In
89. terminals Doing so might cause electric shock CAUTION Wire the SDC15 properly according to predetermined standards Also wire the SDC15 using specified power leads according to recognized installation methods Failure to do so might cause electric shock fire or faulty operation Do not allow lead clippings chips or water to enter the controller case Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation Firmly tighten the terminal screws at the torque listed in the specifications Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause electric shock or fire Do not use unused terminals on the SDC15 as relay terminals Doing so might cause electric shock fire or faulty operation We recommend attaching the terminal cover sold separately after wiring the SDC15 Failure to do so might cause electric shock fire or faulty operation Use the relays within the recommended life Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation 0 Use Yamatake Corporation s SURGENON if there is the risk of power surges caused by lightning Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation Do not make incorrect connections If the cables are connected incorrectly this might cause the unit to malfunction The controller does not function for approximately 6 sec after the power has been turned ON Great care should be taken when the relay output from the controller is used as interlock signals The part between the control output 1 and
90. the reverse action of the deviation high limit when the SP ramp is not used The difference is that the SP ramp does not use the current SP but it uses the final SP Same as the reverse action of the deviation low limit when the SP ramp is not used The difference is that the SP ramp does not use the current SP but it uses the final SP Same as the reverse action of the deviation high low limit when the SP ramp is not used The difference is that the SP ramp does not use the current SP but it uses the final SP 5 39 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Direct action shows that the ON OFF is changed at this value O shows that the ON OFF is changed at a point that type 1U is added to this value Set value of operation Operation type SP high limit SP low limit SP high low limit MV high limit MV low limit MV high low limit lt HYS ON Main setting SP gt ON HYS Main setting 4 N o gt lt ON A HYS i HYS A ON lt La gt Main setting Sub setting sP gt YHyS 4 ON Main setting MV gt ON HYS Main setting x A MV gt gt lt ON HYS f i NYSA ON lt gt Main setting Sub setting MV gt ON HYS t i HYS f ON Main setting Sub setting CT1 at output ON gt OFF before measuring the CT1 current value O Heater 1 burnout Over current Heater 1 short circuit lt
91. type cece cece cece reece cece cence eee e eee eee e eee teen eeeeeenceenees D 8 Chapter 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW ici ceee ise adsee bh deneerGsisebedsdeenwns A ete aad denveroes 1 1 E Model Sel6CliOn table 6 c6ikscssccassicdediadvesdcdsvews iaevassseeeiasawes 1 2 E Accessories and optional parts ceceeeee cece cence eee eenees 1 3 1 2 Part Names and Functions s ecsesceesessecsecseseosesseooesoeseooeo 1 4 E Main body and console ccseccccscsccccseccccecsscsceneseees 1 4 M Bottom panel eee cece cece eee ence eee e eee e erence ence eeeeecenees 1 5 M Rear pannel eee e eee c cece cece eee e eee e teen eee e cence eee eeeeeecenees 1 6 Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS 2 1 Input Output Configuration 0isssseasscecssecsesesnssecssaebsessansees ane 2 1 2 2 Key Operation sessssssessssesssesesssssocossssoossssosossssesoseees 2 2 M Standard key operation type cece cece e cece eee e tence ce eeees 2 2 E Special key operation type cece cece cece ences eecncnceeeees 2 4 E Data setting procedures see e cece eee cece cence ence eeeees 2 6 E mode key operating procedures sceceeceeceeceecneeeeees 2 7 E User l6Ve6l iii cc cerc tsa cciieaetinkehadsad sented eeieeenasbiaeeebes 2 8 2 3 Operation Modes s ssssssssossesessossesossssoesessosossesesoseses 2 9 Chapter 3 INSTALLATION HM Installation place 2 cece cece cece cece eee
92. type List of alarm code Alarm 7 Failure name Sensor burnout incorrect wiring incorrect PV input type setting PV input failure Over range aD RE PV input failure Under range Sensor burnout incorrect wiring incorrect PV input type setting Corrective action Check the wiring Set the PV input type again FiLG3 Cd failure Terminal temperature is faulty thermocouple Check the ambient temperature PV input failure RTD Sensor burnout incorrect wiring Check the wiring Input failure CT input failure Over range CT input 1 or 2 or both A current exceeding the upper limit of the display range was measured The number of CT turns or the number of CT power wire loops is incorrectly set or wiring is incorrect Use a CT with the correct number of turns for the display range e Reset the number of CT turns e Reset the number of CT power wire loops Check the wiring A D conversion failure A D converter is faulty Replace the unit Power is shut down while the data is being set or data is corrupted by noise Parameter failure Power is shut down while the data is being set or data is corrupted by noise Adjustment data failure Unit failure Parameter failure RAM area noise Data is corrupted by Adjustment data Data is corrupted by failure RAM area noise e Restart the unit Set the data again
93. type Setup setting Event Configuration bank e When the internal event configuration 1 operation type is set at 0 No event the internal event configuration 3 alarm OR special OFF setup and delay time unit is not displayed The following shows the relationship among alarm OR setting alarm present not present and internal event ON OFF Alarm OR setting Alarm AL01 to Internal event Internal event 99 present not ON OFF status before ON OFF status after present alarm OR process alarm OR process Not present Not present Present Present Alarm direct Not present OR operation Not present Present Present Alarm direct Not present AND operation Not present Present Present Alarm reverse Not present OR operation Not present Present Present Alarm reverse Not present AND operation Not present Present Present Zz Zz Zz zZ zZ Z Zz Zz Zz a 5 47 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Main setting sub setting and hysteresis Main setting sub setting and hysteresis accompanying with the operation type can be set Internal Event 1 Main setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 1 Sub setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 1 Hysteresis Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 2 Main setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 2 Sub setting Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 2 Hysteresis Parameter setting Event
94. type of the internal event Pez Control output 2 MV scaling Same as control output 1 200 iH to ES Internal Event 1 to 5 hysteresis Oto9999 i 5 TEH CPL MODBUS 0 CPL 1 MODBUS ASCII format 0 Gecis tne paration pe of Ihe ernal eves 5 2 MODBUS RTU format cbs Station address 0 to 127 Communication is disabled when set at 0 0 E to Sa Internal Ever 1to5 ON ile time 0 0 to 999 9 or 0 to 9999 0 2 e656 Transmission speed bps 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 2 E oF to E5 0F Internal Event 1 to 5 OFF delay time Z EEH Data format Data length 0 7 bits 1 8 bits 1 g 68 Data format Parity 0 Even parity 1 Odd parity 2 No parity 0 8 64 Data format Stop bit 0 1 bit 1 2 bits 0 cw Response time out 1 to 250ms 3 PID bank ive Key operation type 0 Standard type 1 Special type 0 mar mode key function 0 Invalid 1 AUTO MANUAL selection 0 Item Contents Initial value Setting value 2 RUN READY selection 3 AT Stop Start Proportional band PID1 0 1 to 999 9 5 0 4 LSP group selection 5 Release all DO latches Integral time PID1 0 to 9999s No integration control action when set at 0 120 6 Ivaki Z Communicator Dit selection 8 kwalid Darbative HET 0 to 9999s No dhaine control action when set at 0 30 ae MODE display setup _ Bit 0 AUTO MANUAL display Enabled 1 255 Manual reset PID1 10 0 to 110 0 50 0 Sum of the weighting Bit 1 RUN READY display Enabled 2 eS Bit 3 AT Stop Start displ
95. unit such as a personal computer or PLC through MODBUS communication LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA This chapter shows the list of communication data inside the memory of this unit MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes the maintenance and inspection of this unit as well as troubleshooting CALIBRATION This chapter describes how to calibrate this unit in order to keep the accuracy and to safely operate this unit for an extended period of time DISPOSAL This chapter describes safety precautions and how to dispose of this unit when the unit is no longer used SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the general specifications performance specifications and optional parts of this unit vi Contents SAFETY REQUIREMENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Important Notice Prior to Use of This Unit The Role of This Manual Organization of This User s Manual Conventions Used in This Manual SDC15 Quick Reference Guide Pare RAMGs ainera eters ka picie weenie dc heeionders bac beesdaadteseessene es D 1 Flowchart of key operations and displayS seeeeeeeeeeeeees D 2 to D 3 Operation examples i lt s svsceseeccavcdyecsunereradteasssbeeetesyeee D 4 to D 5 List of parameter cece cece cere cece cece cence ence nee neceneeeeees D 6 to D 7 PY niput ronge Ableisicriiseiecretoeceestecanicieicalnteree ci teeee tol es D 8 List of alarm COU 6 is kidesiikiesinciiiiisasiascscacesssardsaassacsbediweiaadiaeas D 8 Event
96. user level changed to the desired numerical value Then if no key is pressed for oI ni Lock bank more a me the Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value Isp ah ke is Lot Key lock 0 All settings are possible 0 set and the disp ay 1 Mode event operation display SP UF lock changes from manual MV mode key can be set P 2 Operation display SP UF lock flashing to continu manual MV mode key can be set j 3 UF lock manual MV mode key can be set ously lit Chel Communication lock 0 read write enabled 1 read write disabled 0 0 Simple configuration Lief Loader lock 0 read write enabled 1 read write disabled 0 initial value PASS Password display Oto 15 5 Password TA to 2B display 0 1 Standard configuration PS io Password 1A 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 2 High function configu PSEA Password 2A 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 ration PS il Password 1B 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 PS2b Password 2B 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 PV input range table Thermocouple Sensor type RTD Range 200 to 1200 C Pt100 200 to 500 C 0 to 1200 C JPt100 200 to 500 C 0 to 800 C Pt100 200 to 200 C 0 to 600 C JPt100 200 to 200 C 0 to 400 C Pt100 100 to 300 C 200 to 400 C JPt100 100 to 300 C 0 to 800 C Pt100 50 0 to 200 0 C 0 to 600 C JPt100 50 0
97. voltage pulse Internal Event 2 output and the operation Internal Event 3 type of control output 1 is 7 to 13 Undefined N Internal Event 4 function 1 to 4 ot1 1 gt 2 Internal Event 5 OoakhWonN OoO aouat wo Control output 1 o vie Output assign B 16 to 17 Undefined 18 Dit 19 DI2 20 to 25 Undefined 26 Internal Contact 1 27 Internal Contact 2 28 Internal Contact 3 29 to 33 Undefined 34 Communication DI1 35 Communication DI2 36 Communication DI3 37 Communication D14 38 MANUAL mode 39 READY mode 40 Undefined TE AT running 5 Control output 1 During SP ramp Output assign D Undefined Alarm occurs PV alarm occurs Undefined mode key pressing status Event output 1 status Control output 1 status Control output 1 Output assign C Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level 6 20 Control output 2 The digits are determined to 1st digit 0000 Polarity A to D 2nd digit 3rd digit and 4th digit from 1st digit Polarity A the right end 2nd digit Polarity B 0 Direct 3rd digit Polarity C 1 Reverse 4th digit Polarity D Control output 1 0 Direct Polarity 1 Reverse Control output 1 0 None Latch 1 Latch Latch at ON 2 Latch Latch at OFF except for initialization at power ON Control output 2 Same as Control output 1 Operation Displayed when control Operation type type output 2 of the model is 0 D
98. when the same SP value is written or when the SP value is not changed even though the LSP group number is changed the unit does not enter the standby mode READY READY RUN change a _ 1 i aa OFF OFF OFF standby state OFF standby state 2 Standby or OFF OFF standby state OFF standby state Standby at SP change EVENT state at READY setup 5 46 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Alarm OR special OFF setup and delay time unit Alarm OR special OFF setup and delay time unit accompanying with the operation type can be set Internal Event 1 The digits are called 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd High function Configuration 3 Operation i digit and 4th digit from the right end type 1st digit Alarm OR setup Setup setting Event None Configuration bank Alarm direct OR operation Alarm direct AND operation Internal Event 2 Alarm reverse OR operation Configuration 3 Operation Alarm reverse AND operation type 2nd digit Special OFF setup Setup setting Event As usual Configuration bank When EV main setting is 0 the event is set to OFF 3rd digit Delay time unit setup 0 0 1s 1s 2 1 min 4th digit Undefined Internal Event 4 0 Undefined Configuration 3 Operation 2 type Setup setting Event Configuration bank Internal Event 3 Configuration 3 Operation type 1 Setup setting Event A Configuration bank Internal Event 5 Configuration 3 Operation
99. wire short circuit A and C wire short circuit wire short circuit 0 Downscale 10 FS Downscale 10 FS A and B wire A and 41 Pt100 235 C 5 FS C wire short circuit A and B wire A and 42 JPt100 235 C 5 FS C wire short circuit DC voltage DC current Failure status Indication value Burnout 84 0 to 1V Downscale 3 FS 86 1 to 5V Downscale 10 FS Downscale 3 FS Downscale 0 FS Unknown around 0 FS Downscale 10 FS 10 2 Chapter 11 CALIBRATION CAUTION Do not change the mode to the calibration mode while the control object is being operated When this unit is put in the calibration mode the control output and event output enter the fixed status and they do not function Always start the calibration by considering this point carefully o Handling Precautions It may be required to disconnect and reconnect the wiring for calibration At this time strictly observe the warnings and cautions about wiring stated in Chapter 4 WIRING This chapter describes how to calibrate this unit To calibrate this unit Smart Loader Package SLP C35 is required E Starting the calibration Start up the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 On the menu screen that appears when the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 is started up select Calibration J from the Menu M pull down menu The Calibrate confirmation screen will appear On this screen select OK The Calibration screen will appear a
100. 0 to 1 Undefined Bit 2 AL70 A D Bit 3 AL95 Set data Bit 4 AL96 Adjustment data Bit 5 AL97 Set data RAM Bit 6 AL98 Adjustment data RAM Bit 7 AL99 ROM Bits 8 to 15 Undefined Input alarm status 9201 23F1 25585 Instrument alarm status 9202 23F2 25586 ill x Note 2 If the value is read immediately after it has been written into the SP or the LSP in use the value still may not be changed The value is updated after the cycle time has elapsed Note 3 If the SP or the LSP in use is read immediately after the value has been written into the LSP group selection the value still may not be changed The value is updated after the cycle time has elapsed 9 9 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bank Item name RAM address EEPROM address EEPROM Decimal point Remake Status Internal Event Internal Contact control 9203 23F3 25587 63F3 X X Bits 0 to 4 Internal Event 1 status to5 Bits 5 to 7 Undefined Bits 8 to 10 Internal Contact 1 to 3 Bits 11 to 15 Undefined Control status 9204 23F4 25588 63F4 X X Bit 0 MANUAL mode 0 AUTO 1 MANUAL READY mode 0 RUN mode 1 READY mode Bit 2 Undefined Bit 3 During AT Bit 4 During ST Bit 5 Undefined Bit 6 During SP ramp Bit 7 During SP up ramp Bit 8 During SP down ramp Bits 9 to 12 Undefined Bit 13 PID Heat is being used Bit 14 PID Cool is being used Bit 15 Undefined DO status 9205 23F5 25589 63F5 X X Same as RAM
101. 0000 2 Configuration 3 Configuration 3 1st digit Controller alarm OR 2nd digit Special OFF setup 3rd digit Delay unit 4th digit Undefined Internal Event 3 Same as Internal Event 1 Configuration 1 Configuration 1 Operation type Internal Event 3 Same as Internal Event 1 0000 Configuration 2 Configuration 2 1st digit Direct Reverse 2nd digit Standby 3rd digit EVENT state at READY Ath digit Undefined Internal Event 3 Same as Internal Event 1 0000 2 Configuration 3 Configuration 3 1st digit Controller alarm OR 2nd digit Special OFF setup 3rd digit Delay unit Ath digit Undefined Internal Event 4 Same as Internal Event 1 Configuration 1 Configuration 1 Operation type Internal Event 4 Same as Internal Event 1 0000 Configuration 2 Configuration 2 1st digit Direct Reverse 2nd digit Standby 3rd digit EVENT state at READY Ath digit Undefined Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Internal Event 4 Configuration 3 1st digit Controller alarm OR 2nd digit Special OFF setup 3rd digit Delay unit 4th digit Undefined Internal Event 5 Configuration 1 Operation type Internal Event 5 Configuration 2 1st digit Direct Reverse 2nd digit Standby 3rd digit EVENT state at READY Ath digit Undefined Internal Event 5 Configuration 3 1st digit Controller alarm OR 2nd digit Special OFF setup 3rd digit Delay unit 4th digit Undefined Same as Internal Event 1
102. 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal value 0000 Setup setting Lock bank co e When using only the key lock setting the display can be made but the setting changing cannot be made e When locked with the password the display and setting cannot be made e The display and setting of Password 1A PS1A and Password 2A PS2A can be made only when Password display PASS is 5 and the passwords of two groups 1A and 1B 2A and 2B are matched e The display and setting of Password1B PS1b and Password 2B PS2b can be made only when Password display PASS is 5 e The value set in Password1A PSIA is automatically set to Password1B PS1b e The value set in Password2A PS2A is automatically set to Password2B PS2b C Handling Precautions e Before setting the passwords 1A to 2B determine two hexadecimal values to be used as passwords and take a memorandum of these passwords to record them e PASS is used to prevent incorrect password setting by limiting the display conditions of passwords 1A to 2B e When other values are set for passwords 1B and 2B after the values to be used as passwords have been set for passwords 1A and 2A the passwords 1A and 2A cannot be displayed and the key lock communication lock and loader lock cannot be changed This status is called password lock status e The settings which cannot be changed by the key lock cannot be displayed in the password lock mode e If the pa
103. 1 output ON MV1 output OFF Branching according to output at PV alarm Setting Setup C16 ON OFF control Setting Parameter dIFF oFFS C16 gt 0 0 C16 lt 0 0 MV1 output ON or output OFF MV1 output ON MV1 output OFF 5 9 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Fixed PID Control method Fixed PID Control method ST Self tuning Setting Parameter CtrL Setting Parameter CtrL must be set at 1 must be set at 2 SP lag overshoot suppression ST is not run in the following cases Setting Extended tuning SP Lg e Heat Cool control is used e Just FiTTER is used RationaLOOP high precision control logic Setting Extended tuning Ctr A Adjustment according to step response hunching Setting Extended tuning Just FiTTER overshoot suppression St SA St Sb St Hb St Ud Setting Extended tuning JFiov JF bd Branching according to MANUAL mode Bumpless transfer Preset selection AUTO MANUAL mode Setting Setup C19 C20 AUTO mode PV is faulty and C15 1 Branching according to Output at PV alarm output operation at PV alarm Setting Setup C16 Setting Setup C15 C16 Branching according to RUN READY mode READY mode PV is correct or C15 0 Branching according to Heat Cool control PID control Setting Setup C26 Setting PID P 1 1 1 d 1 rE 1 oL 1 OH 1 P 1 C I 1 C d 1 C oL 1 C oH 1 C Output at READY Setting Setup C17
104. 1 to 999 9 0 Displayed when the control Ea is other than the Integral time 0 to 9999s a ON OFF control CtrL 0 No integration control action when oe at 0 d D Derivative time 0 to 9999s 30 No derivative control action when a at 0 E l Manual reset 10 0 to 110 0 50 0 Displayed when the control method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 and the Integral time l 1 is 107 MV low limit 10 0 to 110 0 o0 1 Displayed when the control method is other than the MV high limit 10 0 to 110 0 100 0 1 ON OFF control CirL 0 ai P Proportional band 0 1 to 999 9 5 0 Le eee when the control cool e is other than the IC Integral time 0 to 9999s 120 A ats Sara a cool No integration control action when a ee OOS ee es at 0 1 d D Derivative time 0 to 9999s 30 a No derivative control action when at 0 oO loll i Output low limit Cool low limit Output low limit Cool 10 0t0 1100 0 to 110 0 oH ft Output high limit ae 0 to 110 0 i ia Cool Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA E Parameter bank Bank selection 5 A r A Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Control method 0 ON OFF control The initial value is O when or control output 1 is relay output The initial value is 1 in other cases 1 Fixed PID 2 ST Self tuning MV low limitat AT 10 0 to 110 0 o0 o Displayed when the co
105. 24mA maximum allowable current can be connected in parallel The rating voltage is 3 5 to 30Vdc Therefore the voltage between the terminals is within the range Voltage between terminals two PGMION units Open voltage internal resistance X total drive current 19Vdc 415 82 40 5 X 20mA 15 to 20V Connection diagram This unit J pp PGM10N PGM10F PGM10N PGM10F Number of connectable units SSR to be used VO VC model Yamatake PGM10N Parallel connection VV model Up to 4 units Note Yamatake PGM10F Parallel connection Note 2 units for each output Up to 4 units Note 4 7 Chapter 4 WIRING 2 Omron s G3PA G3PB G3NA e Input current Since the input current is 7mA or less up to three units 7mA X 3 21mA lt 24mA maximum allowable current can be connected in parallel e Operating voltage range input The rating voltage is 5 to 24Vdc or 12 to 24Vdc Therefore the voltage between the terminals is within the range Voltage between terminals three G3PA units Open voltage internal resistance X total drive current 19Vdce 15 82 0 5 X 21mA 14 to 20V Connection diagram This unit Number of connectable units SSR to be used VO VC model VV model Omron G3PA Parallel connection Up to 6 units Note Omron G3PB Parallel connecti
106. 2nd 3rd Tas ROM Version 2 XX XX 2 digits after decimal point Operation type and 4th digit from the right end TaN Loader information 1st digit Direct Reverse 0 Direct_1 Reverse 0 Paes EST information 2nd digit Standby 0 None 1 Standby 2 Standby Standby at SP change 0 Tao Manufacturing date code Subtract 2000 from the year 3rd digit EVENT state at READY 0 Continue_1 Forced OFF 0 year Example 3 means the year 2003 4th digit Undefined 0 0 Magy Manufacturing date code Month day divided by 100 E LEJ to 5 03 Internal event 1 to 5 Configuration 3 The digits are determined to 1st 2nd 3rd month day Example 12 01 means the 1st day of December and 4th digit from the right end I d38 Serial No a 1st digit Controller alarm OR 0 None 1 Alarm direct OR operation 0 2 Alarm direct AND operation 3 Alarm reverse OR operation C 4 Alarm reverse AND operation A 2nd digit Special OFF setup s usual 0 o Precaution for setup 1 When the event set value main settin P is 0 the event is OFF D The type of auto tuning can be changed by changing the value of z AT 3rd digit Delay unit 0 0 18 1 18 2 imin 0 type in the extended tuning bank Set it to match the control characteristics 4th digit Undefined 0 0 S a r my DI assignment bank Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value Bi ttod 3 Internal contact 1 to 3 0 No function 1 LSP group selection 0
107. 3 812 EVENT value sub 3 813 Hysteresis3 814 0N delay timed 815 0FF delay timed 816 EVENT value main 4 817 EVENT value sub 4 818 Hysteresis4 819 0N delay time4 mi 5 81 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 2 To register currently setting item into the user function If there are any parameters you wish to register into the user function during setting follow the steps below to register such parameters 1 Keep the cursor placed in an item you wish to register and set and then left click the UF icon gt gt The user function resister box will appear 2 Check on Nos you wish to register and click Register gt gt Items you have checked on are then registered Untitled SLP C35 C1STROTAO2XX File Edit Display Communication Setup User Function Option Hep joe SO p BB ES d wr hanam O 0 1s z r ae No Event DISP Internal Event 1 Internal Event 2 Inter amp Bem 1 Type E2 C1 8 Deviation low limit against fine 32 Timer Or R z 2 Polarity E2C2 0 Direct E E Setup Range 3 Stand by E2 C2 0 None 3 T 4 EVENT state at READY E2 C2 0 EVENT continued at Ready O EVENT continued at Ready B Setup CT 5 Controller alarm OR 0 None 2 Seance 6 Special OFF User function Register yo Veni oon 7 Delay unit
108. 8Vdc Digital input RS 485 communication 4 3 Chapter 4 WIRING Wiring of C15S Control output Event output Relay Relay Voltage pulse Relay independent contact Current PV input Power supply Current zO Voti AC Model ollage Vig aS Ss sina Gin sin tunities 100 to 240Vac 91 i i DC Model B 1 i RTD a F 24Vac 24 to 48Vdc Thermocouple i 9 3 lt 3 000A Socket terminal No Recommended crimp type terminal lugs For C15T use an appropriate crimp type terminal lug suitable for the M3 screw For C15S socket mounting type use an appropriate crimp type terminal lug suitable for the M3 5 screw e lt aj Oo 8 ee Cc Mounting method Applicable Terminal dimensions mm Applicable electric J S T Mfg Co Ltd Af e wire size Model No Reference C15T 5 5 to 7 6 0 3 to 1 2mm V1 25 MS3 round terminal lug panel mounting type AWG22 to 16 V1 25 B3A Y terminal lug C15S 7 4 6 3 0 3 to 1 2mm V1 25 M3 round terminal lug socket mounting type AWG22 to 16 V1 25 YS3A Y terminal lug CJ Handling Precautions e When installing this unit in a place where the vibration or impact is large always use an appropriate round crimp terminal so that it is not disengaged from the connection terminal e Pay special attention s
109. 9 ief soo eas rao _ sear zeeor ror _ pron om E ree PPP Pfr rons anne cove rao Typical alarm Eg 3800 30720 7800 ii DO status 14337 3801 30721 7801 ie ee DI status 14338 3802 30722 7802 MURE AUTOMANUAL ae AT soit esa e cores rere x x Reserved for future extension 14355 3813 30739 7813 a x a x Pvwase aoe amo ree xf fxfte SP Tarra Fraser ois aorer ves x x MV Manipulated Variable 14358 see 30742 vers x x 1 ft Bit 0 PV failure ALO1 to 03 Bits 1 to 11 Undefined Bit 12 Hardware failure AL70 Bit 13 Parameter failure AL95 97 Bit 14 Adjustment data failure AL96 98 Bit 15 ROM failure AL99 Same as RAM address 9205 decimal Same as RAM address 9206 decimal x x x x 9 11 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bank Item name RAM address EEPROM address EA EEPROM Decimal poit Remarks Instrument Reserved for future extension 14416 3850 30800 7850 X Same as RAM address status 3 7001 decimal Reserved for future extension 14417 3851 30801 7851 CT Current transformer input 1 current 14418 3852 30802 7852 X value CT Current transformer input 2 current 14419 3853 30803 7853 X value Heat MV for heat cool control 14420 3854 30804 7854 Cool MV for heat cool control 14421 3855 30805 7855 ap Operation LSP group
110. 99U Set value is an absolute value 199 9 to 999 9 Set value is MV Setting is disabled T is displayed at the right end digit when using the ON delay time L is displayed at the right end digit when using the OFF delay time The allowable setting range may vary depending on the operation type of the internal event 1999 to 9999U Set value is other than the following values 0 to 9999U Set value is an absolute value 199 9 to 999 9 Set value is MV Setting is disabled T is displayed at the right end digit when using the ON delay time L is displayed at the right end digit when using the OFF delay time k required by the A type of the internal event is displayed Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the EV display setup C76 Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the timer remain time display setup C77 Setting required by the operation type of the internal event is displayed Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the EV display setup C76 Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the timer remain time display setup C77 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA The allowable setting range may vary depending on the operation type of Setting required by the operation type of the internal Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level a E356 Display example Internal Eve
111. AUTO mode Always OFF ON when AT is executed OFF when AT is stopped ON during SP ramp Reverse action OFF if alarm occurs alarm code ALO1 to 99 ON in other cases OFF in the READY mode ON in the RUN mode OFF in the MANUAL mode ON in the AUTO mode Always ON OFF when AT is executed ON when AT is stopped OFF during SP ramp OFF when SP ramp is not performed or is completed ON when SP ramp is not performed or is completed ON during direct action cooling OFF during reverse action heating ON in the ST setting standby OFF in the ST setting completion Always OFF OFF during direct action cooling ON during reverse action heating OFF in the ST setting standby ON in the ST setting completion Always ON The direct and reverse action settings are disabled for the timer event When using the timer event it is necessary to set the operation type of the DI assignment to Timer Start Stop Additionally when setting the event channel designation of the DI assignment multiple timer events are controlled from individual internal contacts Dl Setting items e ON delay time A period of time necessary to change the event from OFF to ON after DI has been changed from OFF to ON e OFF delay time A period of time necessary to change the event from ON to OFF after DI has been changed from ON to OFF Operation specifications e The event is turned ON when DI ON continues for ON delay
112. CATIONS FUNCTIONS 8 2 Message Structure E Message structure MODBUS ASCII This section describes the message structure All messages are expressed in hexadecimal All messages other than delimiters are written in hexadecimal ASCII codes A message of MODBUS ASCII consists of 1 to 6 below The application layer stores commands which are transmission contents from the master station and responses which are transmission contents from the slave station All messages use ASCII codes Each slot below corresponds to one character 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Start of message colon expressed with ASCII code 3AH 2 Station address 2 bytes 3 Send message response message 4 Checksum two byte LRC 5 CR delimiter 6 LF delimiter e Colon 3AH When a colon 3AH is received the device judges this to be the start of the send message For this reason the device returns to the initial state whatever reception state it was in and processing is started on the assumption that the colon 3AH the first character has been received The purpose of this is to enable recovery of the device s response at the next correct message e g RETRY message from the master station in the event that noise for example causes an error in the sent message Station address Of the messages sent by the master station the device creates response messages only when station addresses are the same Station addresses in me
113. Configuration 2 Same as Internal Event 1 Configuration 3 Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Same as Internal Event 1 Configuration 3 l To Same as Internal Event 1 Configuration 1 l fo l fo Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA E DI Assignment bank Bank selection f Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Internal Contact 1 Operation type Internal Contact 1 Input assign A Internal Contact 1 Input assign B Internal Contact 1 Input assign C Internal Contact 1 Input assign D Internal Contact 1 Input bit function 0 No function 1 LSP group selection 0 1 2 LSP group selection 0 2 3 LSP group selection 0 4 4 to 6 Invalid 7 RUN READY selection 8 AUTO MANUAL selection 9 Invalid 10 AT Stop Start 11 ST disabled enabled 12 Control action direct reverse selection As setting opposite operation of setting 13 SP RAMP enabled disabled 14 PV Hold No hold Hold 15 PV maximum value hold No hold Hold 16 PV minimum value hold No hold Hold Timer Stop Start Release all DO latches Continue Release 19 to 20 Invalid Not used Default input Function 1 A and B or C and D Function 2 A or B and C or D Function 3 A or B or C or D Function 4 A and B and C and D Normally opened OFF 0 Normally closed ON 1 DH DI2 4 to 9 Undefined 10 Internal Event 1 11 I
114. Controller alarm OR AND Setting Event Configuration E1 C3 to E5 C3 ON delay OFF delay Delay time unit Setting Event E1 ON to E5 OF E1 OF to E5 OF E1 Event Configuration E1 C3 to E5 C3 v EVENT state at READY Setting Event Configuration E1 C2 to E5 C2 Internal Event status The following shows the functional block diagram of the internal event g Handling Precautions Even though five internal events 1 to 5 are provided the number of event outputs determined by the optional model is 0 to 3 points With the default settings before shipment the operations of internal events 1 to 3 can be output to event outputs 1 to 3 To utilize the operations of internal events 4 to 5 itis absolutely necessary to set the DO Assignment 5 38 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Operation According to the operation type direct reverse main setting sub setting hysteresis and other settings the operation of the internal event becomes as Operation type PV high limit PV low limit PV high low limit Deviation high limit Deviation low limit Deviation high low limit Deviation high limit Final SP reference Deviation low limit Final SP reference Deviation high low limit Final SP reference follows List of internal event operations Note For details about U unit refer to the attached glossary Direct action of operation shows that the ON OFF is changed at
115. E SP ramp up ramp down CJ Handling Precautions When using the DC voltage DC current input with setting of 3 digits after the decimal point 0 1U is 0 0001 However the SP up ramp SP down ramp setting cannot display 4 digits after the decimal point the value is displayed without use of the decimal point E SP up ramp down ramp The SP up ramp and down ramp can be set SP up ramp Parameter 0 0U No ramp 0 0U High function setting Parameter bank 0 1 to 999 9U SP down ramp Parameter Me T time is s lected using 0 0U setting Parameter bank P i e When an initial value of 0 0U is set the SP ramp function does not function Therefore when the up ramp setting is set to 0 1U or more and the down ramp is set to O 0U the SP ramp functions only during SP up and the SP ramp does not function during SP down Additionally the reverse operation can also be set so that the SP ramp functions only during SP up and it does not function during SP down e Regarding the setting for the number of digits after the decimal point C04 the SP ramp display shows one digit more than is shown for the PV For linear input if C04 is set for 3 digits after the decimal point no decimal point is displayed in the SP ramp value but all 4 displayed digits are after the decimal point The unit for the SP ramp can be selected from every second every minute and every hour in C32 of the SETUP bank The table below shows how the de
116. Energy saving Heat Cool control is used Heat Cool control 100 0 to 100 0 C26 1 dead zone Heat Cool control 10 0 to 110 0 50 0 change point SP ramp unit 0 0 1U s 0 1U shows that the 1 0 1U min decimal point position of the 2 0 1U h PV is shifted one digit rightward T CT1 operation type 0 Heater burnout detection Displayed when the optional 1 Current value measurement model has two current transformer input points C 31 CT1 output 0 Control output 1 Displayed when the optional 7 1 Control output 2 model has two current 2 Event output 1 transformer input points and 3 Event output 2 the CT1 operation type is set 4 Event output 3 at heater burnout detection C36 0 CT1 measurement 30 to 300ms 30 wait time model has two current CT2 operation type Same as CT1 transformer input points CT2 output Same as CT1 Displayed when the optional model has two current transformer input points and the CT2 operation type is set at heater burnout detection C39 0 C CT2 measurement Same as CT1 30 wait time m an c 5 ry mu ry Po Da mx Ma om maj Pap rap rs Mop Pop Pop Da Cay a Soy u ry DJ mu Displayed when the optional 6 9 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Control output 1 1 4 to 20mA range 2 0 to 20mA Control output 1 type Control output 1 scaling low limit 45 Control output 1 scaling high limi
117. IN U DIN L DIN43710 1985 RTD Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 JPt100 JIS C1604 1989 DC voltage 0 to 1Vdc 1 to 5Vdc 0 to 5Vdc 0 to 10Vdc DC current 0 to 20mAdc 4 to 20mAdc 500ms 0 5 FS 1 digit 1 FS 1digit in the negative area of the thermocouple Specified by the input conversion at an ambient temperature of 23 2 C However the accuracy of the B thermocouple is 5 FS at a temperature of 260 C or less and 1 FS at a temperature of 260 to 800 C The low limit for indication is 20 C However if ROM version of the instrument information bank 2 is prior to 2 04 the low limit for indication is 180 C 1999 to 9999 or 199 9 to 999 9 0 2uA Flowed from the A terminal Upscale ALO1 0 3 to 0 65mm diameter 0 5 to 12V e Resistance temperature detector RTD input Input bias current Burnout indication Allowable wiring resistance Influence of wiring resistance Allowablr input voltage e DC voltage input Input impedance Input bias current Burnout indication Allowablr input voltage e DC current input Input impedance Burnout indication Allowable input current Allowable input voltage Approx 1mA Flowed from the A terminal RTD burnout or A wire burnout Upscale ALOL B wire burnout or C wire burnout Upscale ALO1 ALO3 2 or more wires burnout Upscale ALO1 ALO3 Max 10 at range No 51 to 64 max 85Q the other ranges Max 0 05 FS Q Max 10 at range N
118. ION OF EACH FUNCTION E CT display setup Whether or not the CT current value is displayed in the operation display mode can be set CT display setup 0 CT current value is not displayed in the Standard Setup setting Setup bank operation display mode High function 1 CT1 current value is displayed in the operation display mode 2 CT1 to 2 current values are displayed in the operation display mode e When the optional model has two CT input points the display and setting can be made E User level The user level of the console display can be set As a larger value is set the number of possible displays settings is increased User level 74 0 Simple configuration Simple Setup setting Setup bank L 1 Standard configuration Standard 2 High function configuration High function E Communication monitor display The function of the decimal point LED at the right end digit of the lower display lower 4 digit display can be set Communication monitor 0 Disabled High function display Flashing while data is sending through RS Setup setting Setup bank 485 communication Flashing while data is receiving through RS 485 communication Logical OR of all DI statuses Flashing in READY mode 5 78 E User Function User Function 2 Setup setting User Function bank User Function 3 Setup setting User Function bank User Function 4 Setup setting User Function bank User Function 5 Setup setting
119. Internal Event 1 sub settin de Numeric value j Aa Setup bank Ek Display example Internal Event 1 remaining Setting is disabled P p Display Item Contents Initial value _Setingvave Numeric value time r is displayed at the right end digit when using z the ON delay time and L the OFF delay time coi PV input range type For details refer to the PV Input Range Table Depending on Model Noj Ee Internal Event 2 main setting Same as Internal Event 1 main setting 0 ce Temperature unit 0 Celsius C 1 Fahrenheit F 0 Numeric value a E03 Cold junction compensation 0 Performed internal 1 Not performed external 0 Ee 5b Internal Event 2 sub setting Same as Internal Event 1 sub setting 0 ay cay Decimal point position 0 No decimal point 0 Numeric value amp 1 to 3 1 to 3 digits below decimal point 1 Ee Display example Internal Event 2 remaining Same as Internal Event 1 remaining time gt PV input range low limit When the PV input type is DC voltage DC current 0 Numeric value time w 06 PV input range high limit 1999 to 9999U 1000 EF Internal Event 3 main setting Same as Internal Event 1 main setting 0 amp cot SP low limit PV input range low limit to PV input range Numeric value cog SP high limit high limit E3 Sb Internal Event 3 sub setting Same as Internal Event 1 sub setting 0 cog PV square root extraction dropout 0 0 to 100 0 PV square root extraction 0 0 Numeric value
120. J a EJ 4 a La Output operation at changing 5219 ee et Auto Manual Preset MANUAL value 5220 1464 21604 5464 Initial output type mode of PID control 5221 1465 21605 5465 Initial output of PID control 5222 1466 21606 s46 Reserved for future extension 5223 1467 21607 5467 a Reserved for future extension 5224 1468 21608 5468 a Reserved for future extension 5225 1469 21609 5469 a Heat Cool control 5226 146A 21610 54a Heat Cool selection 5227 1468 21611 548 Heat Cool control dead zone 5228 1460 21612 ssec Heat Cool control change point 5229 146D 21613 540 LE ES ES ES EJ La ai all i Lf ES Ez X LSP system group 5230 Reserved for future extension 5231 SP ramp unit 5232 Reserved for future extension 5233 Reserved for future extension 5234 Reserved for future extension 5235 CT1 operation type 5236 CT1 output 5237 CT1 measurement wait time 5238 CT2 operation type 5239 CT2 output 5240 CT2 measurement wait time 5241 Control output 1 range 5242 Control output 1 type 5243 Control output 1 scaling low limit 5244 Control output 1 scaling high limit 5245 Control output 1 MV scaling 5246 Con put 2 range 5247 Control output 2 type 5248 Control output 2 scaling low limit 5249 Control output 2 scaling high limit 5250 Control output 2 MV scaling 5251 Reserved for fu
121. L mode change the mode to the AUTO mode 4 Set the parameter setting AT Stop Start to AT start At At on E Stopping procedures The AT function is completed automatically To stop the AT function which is running change the parameter setting AT Stop Start to AT stop At At oF Additionally the AT function is stopped when changing the READY mode to the MANUAL mode Display during execution of AT eM LED sp oo0oo0oo0oo0oaoo tdy man evi ev2 e3 oti o2 E vV A y The decimal point at the 1st digit of the display No 1 right end digit flashes twice repeatedly while the AT function is running When the AT function is completed and the PID constants are changed this LED goes off Operation during execution of AT The AT function calculates the PID constants using the limit cycle 1 When the AT function is started a point where the SP and PV deviations are split to 2 1 is determined as ON OFF change point of the MV manipulated variable 2 When the limit cycle is judged as stable the PID constants are changed and the AT function is completed 5 21 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Insufficient Stable sees t stability cycle A x AT start Normal end Time In the Heat Cool control the AT function is run in the status that both the heat MV and cool MV are operated In the first half the MV is changed to the MV low
122. M3 screw The tightening torque of the terminal screw is 0 4 to 0 6N m C15S Socket mount type Socket part Socket part This socket is inserted into the optional socket The power supply input and output are connected from the socket When performing the wiring from the socket always use a correct crimp terminal suitable for the M3 5 screw The tightening torque of the socket terminal screw is 0 78 to 0 98N m or less 1 6 Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS 2 1 Input Output Configuration Analog PV input PV Control output i process process process Control output 1 2 ON OFF Current output control Internal PID control Digital input 1 2 contact process Control output 1 2 Y Relay output voltage Internal pulse output 3 CT event Digital CT input 1 2 process process output process A Event output 1 to 3 Other gt Relay output PV input Sensor or range is selected for the PV input The selection range may vary depending on the input type of the model T Thermocouple R RTD L DC current DC voltage Control output When the control output type of the model is R Relay or V Voltage pulse the control output becomes the ON OFF control output or time proportional output When the time proportional output is used the time proportioning cycle time can be set When the control ou
123. MVVS may be used if electromagnetic induction noise are comparatively low 4 11 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 1 PV Input The following shows the functional block diagram of the PV input PV input is thermocouple PV input is RTD PV input is DC voltage DC current PV input range type PV input range type PV input range type Setting Setup C01 Setting Setup C01 Setting Setup C01 Cold junction compensation T C PV square root extraction Setting Setup C03 Setting Setup C09 Temperature unit Temperature unit Decimal point position and scaling Setting Setup C02 Setting Setup C02 Setting Setup C04 to C06 PV high limit low limit alarm PV before ratio bias and filter PV hold Setting DI Assignment Operation type dl1 1 to dl3 1 E PV input range type When the PV input type is T thermocouple or R RTD the sensor type and temperature range can be selected When the PV input range type is L DC voltage DC current the signal type can be selected PV input range type The contents may vary depending on the PV The initial value may Simple Setup setting Setup bank input range type vary depending on Standard For details refer to the PV input range table the PV input range High function type as shown below Th 4 R 41 L 88 5 1 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION PV input range table Thermocouple PV input range table RTD C01
124. NT INSTALLATION The controller must be mounted into a panel to limit operator access to the rear terminal Specifications of common mode voltage The common mode voltages of all I O except for main supply and relay outputs are less than 33Vrms 46 7V peak and 70Vdc APPLICABLE STANDARDS EN61010 1 EN61326 1 IF SAFETY PRECAUTIONS J E About Icons The safety precautions described in this manual are indicated by various icons Please be sure you read and understand the icons and their meanings described below before reading the rest of the manual Safety precautions are intended to ensure the safe and correct use of this prod uct to prevent injury to the operator and others and to prevent damage to proper ty Be sure to observe these safety precautions Warnings are indicated when mishandling this A WAR N I N G product might result in death or serious injury Cautions are indicated when mishandling this A CAUTION product might result in minor injury to the user or only physical damage to the product E Examples AN Use caution when handling the product S The indicated action is prohibited Q Be sure to follow the indicated instructions WARNING Do not disassemble the SDC15 Doing so might cause electric shock or faulty operation Before removing mounting or wiring the SDC15 be sure to turn off the power to the SDC15 and all connected devices Failure to do so might cause electric shock
125. ON becomes the LSP group number e Do not use 14 PV value hold 15 PV Max hold and 16 PV Min hold with they mixed Do not set the same operation type other than 0 No function and 1 to 3 LSP group selection for multiple internal contacts e When using the Heat Cool control do not use 12 Control action direct reverse selection e For timer stop start set a target Event channel using Event channel def of internal contact The following Table shows the contents of the dI settings LSP group selection 0 4 Invalid ST Self tuning disabled enabled ST enabled 5 33 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Event channel def When the operation type is the timer start stop a target Event channel can be set Internal Contact 1 Event 0 Every Internal Event High function channel def 1 Setup setting DI Assignment bank to 5 Internal Event number Internal Contact 2 Event channel def Setup setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 3 Event channel def Setup setting DI Assignment bank e When the operation type of the same internal contact No is set at Timer stop start the display and setting can be made E Input bit function Four kinds of input bit functions are provided What function of four functions is used or is not used can be set Internal Contact 1 Input bit 0 Not used Default input High function function 1 Function 1 A and B or C and D
126. Other E Lock LE DI Configuration Option HE User Function E DO Configuration HE Tuning HE Other HE Mode LE PID in use able Input Valid settings 200 iF Taq Name lt to 1200 RAM Address 7005 EEPROM Address 23389 Example 1 Logical OR of the heater burnout and PV high limit alarm is output Conditions PV high limit is set to Internal Event 1 Heater burnout is set to Internal Event 2 Logical OR of the above events is output to the EV1 relay 1 Select Standard Event and set Internal Event 1 to 1 PV high limit 2 Similarly set Internal Event 2 to 16 Heater 1 break Heater over current 3 Select Option gt DO Assignment and right click on the operation type of Event output 1 to select Input Output port setup 5 59 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Untitled SLP C35 C15TROTAOOXX File Edit Display Communication Setup User Function Option Help Dea hae 2 lA E amp FF tq Name DER 4 In the Input Output port setup window set the following items a In this example since the logical OR of two functions needs to be output select Function 1 b Select PV high limit of Internal Event 1 for output assign A c Similarly select Heater break of Internal Event 2 for output assign C d Select Normally closed for o
127. Pee ablesssatecigew det eavedesiecessetabes 5 2 PY TAD 6ossdscsetoss anso ki n een eereenteanss 5 5 PV square root extraction sssssreeeeeeeeee 5 1 PV square root extraction dropout 5 3 PVSP display Seti aanre 5 75 R Rational OOP s4ciccagisessintseesesadees Tel 3 20 RD Conia obs decsaed eee e wed Sees Reais 7 8 Read command issccccnsecvcavevesaceevcnssas 8 6 PEAD criin ronne 5 44 Reception and transmission timing 7 15 Relay independent contact eeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 3 Release all DO latches sceccveccscccsuccs 5 8 Remote SP s4ss20c04 set esse eva wssnewt es sastens 5 37 Resistor type ssssssseeerrsesseereresseee 4 9 Response monitor time rsrrrrsreresseririsrers Is Response start conditions sssssssesssseees 7 3 BS commond 2cscencsceddasedtarsssacdbesigees 7 6 RS command scr isucveenncercnasddengaseesouses 7 6 RS 485 driver control timing seeeeee 7 15 RID wiciisevatvine ii iraro rR ENN EAEN 5 1 RU eomiinand soi csancvsccapacsraveawsix ccanren 7 10 RU command ss ccidsteacawcknee iva k kiona rrai 7 10 RUNJREADY in0d esc4202 2scs5nxescnenoeanses 5 7 S Sample program sseeeeeee cece eee eeeeee 7 17 Sampling cycle ee ee eee eT eee 13 1 Scaling 0 eesee cece cece e eee e een io rsi ortet 5 1 SelM UMN ereere issiron Rer o E E NA 5217 Senso Hes ire itveesacereisedeuews seeds 52 Simple configuration sseeeeeeeee ee eeeeeee 2 1 Socket mount type
128. Setup AO B Setup Comm E Setup MS display E Setup Other E Lock E DI Configuration Option amp User Function E Zone E DO Configuration E Tuning E Other E Mode E PID in use ETI ai Table Input id 3 1 valid settings 0 to 1000 RAM Address 7005 EEPROM Address 23389 5 80 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION File i DO Sarh 1 Select Option gt User Function 2 Select 1 Event in Group select 3 Select 801 Event value in Item select Untitled SLP C35 C35TVCUA22XX Edit Display Communication Setup User Function Option Help bE B BB et Ga iF Tag Name E Setup Range EB Setup Ctrl E Setup SP E Setup CT E Setup Ad E Setup Comm E Setup MS display E Setup Other User Function pIsP Sett ing User Function 1 UF 1 O Unreg User Function 2 uF 2 O Unres User Function 3 UF 3 O Unres User Function 4 User Function 5 2 User Function 6 ir 1 Event User Function gt 5 5 3 User Function 8 Ttem select O Unregistered 801 EVENT value main EVENT value sub 803 Hysteres 804 0N delay time 805 0FF delay time 806 EVENT value main 2 807 EVENT value sub 2 808 Hysteresis2 809 ON delay time2 810 0FF delay time2 811 EVENT value main
129. T hunting settling width St Hb When the PV moves up or down so that the value of the absolute value deviation to the PV range becomes larger than the set value this is judged as hunching and then the ST is started After that the value of the absolute value deviation to the PV range becomes smaller than the set value this is judged as that the hunching is settled CJ Handling Precautions gt ST Self tuning Function on page 5 24 Precautions for ST Self tuning on page 5 26 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E AT Auto tuning The following AT related items can be set MV low limit at AT ie a 3 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 Simple Parameter HEO L Standard setup Parameter bank High function MV high limit at AT Ak oH 10 0 to 110 0 100 0 Parameter setup Parameter bank AT type 0 Normal Standard control characteristics Parameter setup Extended i Nellore response Control tuning bank characteristics that respond immediately to external disturbance 2 Stable Control characteristics having less aan fluctuation of PV AT Integral time adjust 0 00 to 99 99 Parameter setup Extended tuning bank AT Derivative time adjust J 0 00 to 99 99 Parameter setup Extended tuning bank e When the control method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 the display and setting can be made AT Proportional band A p 0 00 to 99 99 High function adjust he Parameter setup Extended tuning bank
130. Yamatake Corporation liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages as a result of using this product 2003 Yamatake Corporation ALL RIGHTS RESERVED SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A To reduce risk of electric shock which could cause personal injury follow all safety notices in this documentation A This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where hazardous live voltages may be accessible If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment must be impaired e Do not replace any component or part not explicitly specified as replaceable by your supplier e All wiring must be in accordance with local norms and carried out by authorized and experienced personnel e A switch in the main supply is required near the equipment e Main power supply wiring requires a T 200mA 250V fuse s IEC 127 EQUIPMENT RATINGS Supply voltages 100 to 240V operating power supply voltage 85 to 264Vac Frequency 50 60Hz Power consumption 12VA maximum EQUIPMENT CONDITIONS Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Temperature 0 to 50 C Humidity 10 to 90 RH no condensation Vibration 2m s 10 to 60Hz Over voltage category Category II IEC60364 4 443 IEC60664 1 Pollution degree Pollution degree 2 EQUIPME
131. arameter of the next parameter bank v key Displays the next parameter a key Displays the previous parameter enter key Executes the start and confirmation of a setting change e When using the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 User Function can be registered even though the conditions for instrument status are set as display disabled CJ Handling Precautions Settings registered as user functions are displayed as if the user level is High function in spite of the actual user level setting in setup C79 Otherwise the display is according to the C79 setting 5 79 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION EE User Function setting procedures This section describes an example of setting with the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 When registering the user function up to eight parameters can be registered to the para key When frequently used functions are registered this ensures convenient operation In this example the main setting of event 1 is registered into UF1 1 To register a user function from the user function item When using this function first set the user level to Standard configuration or High function configuration Untitled SLP C35 C35TVCUA22 X File Edit Display Communication SetGp Userkunction Option Help osu Heeg B B Se amp F Taname lo x E Para E Setup Range E Setup Ctrl E Setup SP EB Setup CT E
132. arity D 5631 15FF 22015 sorF Event output 1 Polarity 5632 1600 22016 5600 Event output 1 Latch 5633 1601 22017 5601 Event output 2 Operation type 5634 1602 22018 562 Event output 2 Output assign A 5635 1603 22019 563 Event output 2 Output assign B 5636 1604 22020 5604 Event output 2 Output assign C 5637 1605 22021 5605 Event output 2 Output assign D 5638 1606 22022 5606 Event output 2 Polarity A 5639 1607 22023 567 Event output 2 Polarity B 5640 1608 22024 5608 Event output 2 Polarity C 5641 1609 22025 5609 Event output 2 Polarity D 5642 160A 22026 560A Event output 2 Polarity 5643 1608 22027 se Event output 2 Latch 5644 160c 22028 seoc Event output 3 Operation type 5645 160D 22029 5600 Event output 3 Output assign A 5646 160E 22030 56E Event output 3 Output assign B 5647 160F 22031 se Event output 3 Output assign C 5648 1610 22032 560 Event output 3 Output assign D 5649 1611 220833 51 J Event output 3 Polarity A 5650 1612 22034 5612 Event output 3 Polarity B 5651 5613 Event output 3 Polarity C 5652 1614 22036 5614 Event output 3 Polarity D 5653 1615 22037 565 Event output 3 Polarity 5654 1616 22038 see Event output 3 Latch 5655 1617 22039 567 Internal Event
133. art conditions are satisfied with the control method set at ST CtrL 2 the ST function is started automatically to change the PID constants 1 ST start by SP change If the SP is changed in the RUN mode the ST function is started However if the SP change width is small or if the difference between the SP and PV is small the ST is not started 2 ST start by deviation occurrence If the difference between the SP and PV is large during control in the RUN mode the ST is started If the difference between the SP and PV is large when the READY mode is changed to the RUN mode the ST is started If the difference between the SP and PV is large when the control is started in the RUN mode after the power has been turned ON the ST is started B Handling Precautions e To start the ST it is necessary that the integration time of the PID constant is not 0 I 1 0 and the derivative time is not 0 d 1 0 e To start the ST it is necessary that the mode is the RUN mode and AUTO mode e To set the SP change width or the reference value used to judge large small difference between the SP and PV it is necessary to set High function configuration However the default settings before shipment apply to most control subjects e When using the heat cool control the ST cannot be used E Starting procedures 1 Make sure that the PV input or operation end heater power etc is controllable 2 Make sure that the
134. as 2 to 40 CT turns divided by 100 current transformer inputs this setting is displayed 0 800 turns 1 to 40 CT turns divided by 100 0 1 time 1 to 6 Number of times CJ Handling Precautions e lf ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank z is prior to 2 04 the setting options for Number of CT1 turns Number of CT1 power wire loops Number of CT2 turns and Number of CT2 power wire loops are not displayed 6 12 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA E Event eer bank Bank selection j g LF re Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Internal Event 1 No event Configuration 1 PV high limit Operation type PV low limit PV high low limit Deviation high limit Deviation low limit Deviation high low limit Deviation high limit Final SP reference Deviation low limit Final SP reference Deviation high low limit Final SP reference SP high limit SP low limit SP high low limit MV high limit MV low limit MV high low limit CT1 heater burnout over current CT1 heater short circuit CT2 heater burnout over current CT2 heater short circuit Loop diagnosis 1 Loop diagnosis 2 Loop diagnosis 3 Alarm status READY status MANUAL status Invalid During AT execution status During SP ramp status Control direct action status During ST execution status Invalid Timer status High and low limits of MFB value
135. at your Equipment is to comply with 2 Examples of application described in any documents provided by Yamatake are for your reference purpose only and you are required to check the functions and safety of your Equipment prior to your use 3 Measures to be taken to secure the required level of the reliability and safety of your Equipment in your use Although Yamatake is constantly making efforts to improve the quality and reliability of Yamatake products there exists a possibility that parts and machinery may break down You are required to provide your Equipment with fool proof design fail safe design anti flame propagation design safety design or the like so that the said Equipment may satisfy the level of the reliability and safety required in your use whereby preventing any occurrence of physical injuries fires significant damage and so forth 3 Precautions and restrictions on application Yamatake products other than those explicitly specified as applicable e g Yamatake Limit Switch For Nuclear Energy shall not be used in a nuclear energy controlled area radiation controlled area Any Yamatake products shall not be used for with medical equipment In addition you are required to conduct a consultation with our sales representative and understand detail specifications cautions for operation and so forth by reference to catalogs specifications instruction manual etc in case that you intend to use Yamatake product for any purpose
136. ay Enabled 8 emv low limit PID1 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 Bit 4 Release all DO latches display Enabled 16 MV high limit PID1 10 0 to 110 0 100 0 Bit 5 Communication DIt ON OFF display Enabled 32 Proportional band cool PID1 0 1 to 999 9 5 0 Other invalid setting 0 4 64 128 Integral time cool PID1 0 to 9999s No integration control action when set at 0 120 N PV SP display setup Bit 0 PV display Enabled 1 15 Derivative time cool PID1 0 to 9999s No derivative control action when set at 0 30 Sum of the weighting Bit 1 SP display Enabled 2 Output low limit cool PID1 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 Bit 2 LSP group number display Enabled 4 Output high limit cool PID1 10 0 to 110 0 100 0 Other invalid setting 0 8 cs MV display setup Bit 0 MV display Enabled 1 15 Ei Sum of the weighting Bit 1 Heat MV cool MV display Enabled 2 pi Bit 3 AT progress display Enabled 8 For Ff Org EV display set Neos a 2st 0 rrr srt 2 ot isplay setu Not displaye Parameter bank n E Operation display 1 Set value or Internal event 1 is displayed Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value 5 2 Set values of Internal event 1 to 2 are displayed Cirt Control method 0 ON OFF control 1 Fixed PID Oor1 i ar 3 Set values of Internal event 1 to 3 are displayed 2 ST Self tuning qyen Timer remain time display setup 0 Not displayed 0 AE ob MV low li
137. ay item The decimal point at the right end digit shows the communication status Mode indicators rdy RUN READY mode indicator Lights when READY man AUTO MANUAL mode indicator Lights when MANUAL ev1 ev2 ev3 Event 1 to 3 output indicator Lights when event relays are ON ot1 ot2 Control 1 to 2 output indicator Lights when the control output is ON The indicators are always lit when the current output is used CJ Handling Precautions e To select the LSP group using the mode key it is necessary to set a value of 2 or more in LSP system group To show the communication status using the decimal point at the right end digit on the lower display select High function configuration and make the LED monitor settings e Do not operate the key with a sharp object such as tip of mechanical pencil or needle Doing so might cause the unit to malfunction Loader connector Loader connector This connector is connected to a personal computer using the dedicated cable supplied with the Smart Loader Package 1 5 Chapter 1 OVERVIEW E Rear panel C15T Panel mount type Terminal part lt Terminal part The power supply input and output are connected to the terminals The M3 screw is used When connecting to the terminal always use a correct crimp terminal suitable for the
138. bd HYS ON Main setting CT1 at output OFF gt OFF before measuring the CT1 current value o gt lt on 4 HYS Avs ON lt QO gt Main setting Sub setting CT2 at output ON gt OFF before measuring the CT2 current value Heater 2 burnout Over current Heater 2 short circuit o lt bd HYS ON Main setting CT2 at output OFF gt OFF before measuring the CT2 current value 5 40 Reverse action shows that the ON OFF is changed at this value O shows that the ON OFF is changed at a point that 1U is added to this value HYS Main setting SP lt HYS ON Main setting sP gt lt gt tuys ont HYS O gt lt Main setting Sub setting sP gt HYS Main setting MV gt lt HYS ON Main setting MV gt lt gt pis ON HYS gt lt QO Main setting Sub setting MV gt HYS 4 ON HYS Main setting Sub setting CT1 at output ON gt OFF before measuring the CT1 current value ry ON HYS Main setting CT1 at output OFF OFF before measuring the CT1 current value lt gt yHys4 on 4 HYS l gt lt Main setting Sub setting CT2 at output ON gt OFF before measuring the CT2 current value ON HYS Main setting CT2 at output OFF OFF before measuring the CT2 current value Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Operation type Set value Direct
139. ber of CT2 turns 0 800 turns 1 to 40 CT turns divided by 100 8 i i E i CaF Number of CT2 power wire loops 0 T time 1 to 6 Number of times T 1 0 1s unit 1 Cycle fixed at 0 5s 2 Cycle fixed at 0 25s U Unit Maximum unit of Industrial vol a 1 Not available for thermocouples 3 Cycle fixed at 0 1s ume in PV range C Pa L min etc 2 5 to 120s when output includes the relay output D 6 e Items marked in the tables are displayed in standard and or high function configuration e To change a user level refer to Changing the user level in the lower right part of this page D 7 EJE A dof i PAID Event configuration bank vas Instrument information bank Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value ELC Mo ES Internal event 1 to 5 Configuration 1 Refer to event type see page 8 0 dat ROM ID 0 SDC15 0 _ Operation type Page ROM Version 1 XX XX 2 digits after decimal point Eile to ESE Internal event 1 to 5 Configuration 2 The digits are determined to 1st
140. bit functions 1 to 4 the combination of the logical operations may vary The following shows one logical operation Logical AND Logical OR OFF and OFF OFF OFF or OFF OFF OFF and ON OFF OFF or ON ON ON and OFF OFF ON or OFF ON ON andON ON ON or ON ON 5 53 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Output assign Control output 1 Output assign A Setup setting D Assignment bank Control output 1 Output assign B Setup setting DO Assignment bank Control output 1 Output assign C Setup setting DO Assignment bank Control output 1 Output assign D Setup setting DO Assignment bank Control output 2 Output assign A Setup setting DO Assignment bank Control output 2 Output assign B Setup setting DO Assignment bank Control output 2 Output assign C Setup setting DO Assignment bank Control output 2 Output assign D Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 1 Output assign A Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 1 Output assign B Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 1 Output assign C Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 1 Output assign D Setup setting DO Assignment bank 5 54 o ot The assign of four inputs A B C D used for the output bit function can be set Normally opened OFF 0 Normally closed ON 1 Internal Event 1 Internal Event 2 Internal Event 3 Internal Event 4 Internal Event 5 7 to 13 Und
141. ble to set the AUTO MANUAL mode selection RUN READY mode selection AT Auto Tuning stop start selection release all DO digital output latches and OFF ON selection of communication DI digital input 1 E AUTO MANUAL mode The AUTO MANUAL mode selection can be set AUTO MANUAL AUto AUTO mode Communication value is Simple Parameter setting Mode Oo Standard bank MAn MANUAL mode Communication value High function is 1 e When the AUTO MANUAL mode is changed the display is automatically returned to the operation display e If the operation type of internal contacts to 3 is set at AUTO MANUAL A M AUTO MANUAL can be displayed but the setting cannot be made e When CtrL Control method is set at 0 ON OFF control A M AUTO MANUAL cannot be displayed and set e When bit 0 AUTO MANUAL display of C73 MODE display setup is set at 0 no display A M AUTO MANUAL cannot be displayed and set E RUN READY mode The RUN READY mode selection can be set RUN READY rUn RUN mode Communication value is 0 rUn Simple Parameter setting Mode rdy READY mode Communication value is Standard bank T High function e If the operation type of internal contacts 1 to 3 is set at RUN READY r r RUN READY can be displayed but the setting cannot be made e When bit 1 RUN READY display of C73 MODE display setup is set at 0 no display r r RUN READY cannot be display
142. calibration first and then perform the Span calibration next since Zero Span is set for one channel 4 Click Read 5 A current value of 0 is applied to the CT input terminal of the channel you have selected and keep the apply status for approximately 30 sec For details about how to connect measuring instruments in the apply status refer to the following Figures CT input 1 This unit CT input 2 This unit Current Current generator generator 6 7 wm Click Write a Select Span from the zero span selection items 8 wm Click Read 9 Apply a span current value to the CT input terminal of the channel you have selected and keep the apply status for approximately 30 sec 10 Click Write 11 If any channels to be calibrated remain return to operation step 2 C Handling Precautions To calibrate the CT input connect the DC current mA to the input terminal Chapter 11 CALIBRATION Current output calibration 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Control output 1 This unit Select the Analog Output Calibration tab Select a desired channel to be calibrated Select ch1 for control output 1 and ch2 for control output 2 Select Zero from the zero span selection items When selecting a channel perform the Zero calibration first and then perform the Span calibration next since Zero Span is set for one channel W
143. can be selected from the CPL communications Controller Peripheral Link Yamatake s host communications protocol and the MODBUS communications This chapter describes the CPL communications E Features E Setup The features of the SDC15 s communications functions are as follows e Up to 31 SDC 15 units can be connected to a single master station as a host device e When the communications specifications of the host device conform to the RS 232C interface the communications converter CMC10L sold separately is required The CMC10L allows you to perform the conversion between RS 232C and RS 485 e Almost all of the parameters held by the device can be communicated G Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA e Random access commands are available Two or more number of parameters at separated addresses can be read or written by a single command The following setups are required for performing the CPL communications The items on the table below can be displayed and set up only when the optional model number is provided with the RS 485 communications function Item Display Contents Initial User Setting display bank value level CPL MODBUS C 54 CPL Simple Setup setting Setup bank 1 MODBUS ASCII format Standard 2 MODBUS RTU format High function Station address 0 Does not communicate Same as above 1 to 127 Transmission speed C G amp G 0 4800bps Same as above 1 9600bps 2 19200bps 3 38400bps Data format
144. cation layer sssesrssrereeserrereee T3 TS AT progress display seessssesssserrereerereee 6 1 ATs orori aaaea A EDENE S 21 AT Stop Start ssessssssessesesereserreessse 5 8 Auto tuning ee eee eee ee eee eee eee 5 18 5 21 AUTOMANUAL Mod rrisissecicrsicsrersesas 5 7 C Calibration ias2s0ccacaviaddsduranrarade eaacaeds 11 1 CE marking ese e cece eee e eee e tence eens 1 1 Checks oiidscicinoteigecegiedatiieeea Eneee Fal Cold junction compensation T C lt 5 1 5 3 Command sa 05 vceers cases ees itii nrin ta NETES 1 5 Commicion loleetedeus eee thaceeeevee trees 5 8 Communication lock siescccseiscacinescxacnaas 5 83 COMMUNICATION mode 206320idsa cede svaacsavane Fl Communication monitor display 5 75 Communications function seeeeeeeeee 7 1 Communications procedures eeeeeeeeeees 7 2 Connection of communication cable 4 5 Console display ssssesessssersssreessee 5 73 CONSOLE co5tkaicgcovardsdisets acaba iedameiwade T CONSE cs ign retiobade ce beaks e De Continuous data read ssnsca cssass ceivenaeiane 7 6 Continuous data WHI s2i6cecccerseascavswirenss 1 7 Continuous output seesesreresseresssssesee 5 66 Control action Direct lt r ricnsrirainisercres 5 44 Control SEO 8242 50 e Sedat donesabeanedakeos 5212 Control method 2 040615 ca serereesasrianscnas 5 11 Control output type eesessessesersererreeree Ted Control output 6 eee eee eee eee eee
145. cimal point position varies depending on the PV input range C01 PV input range type C04 Decimal point position SPU SP ramp up SPD SP ramp down 2 0 to 1200 C Setting disabled 0 0 to 999 9 0 0 to 999 9 3 0 0 to 800 0C 0 No decimal point 0 0 to 999 9 0 0 to 999 9 1 1 digit after the decimal point 0 00 to 99 99 0 00 to 99 99 38 010 10V 00103999 0 00 0 99 99 0 000 to 9 999 0 0000 to 0 9999 e The ramp is started assuming that the current PV value is used as start point when any of the following conditions is satisfied The power is turned ON READY AUTO status is changed to RUN AUTO status RUN MANUAL status is changed to RUN AUTO status The AT function is completed both normal end and forced stop e Before changing the setting for the SP ramp make sure that SP ramping is not in progress If the setting is changed while SP ramping is in progress the SP may change suddenly 5 30 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E SP low limit high limit The SP low limit and high limit can be set to limit the SP range SP low limit E g 7 PV input range low limit to PV input range PV input range low Standard Setup setting Setup bank high limit limit High function SP high limit x og PV input range low limit to PV input range PV input range high Standard Setup setting Setup bank 7 high limit limit High function C Handling Precautions When the PV input range type setup C01 is set the SP low limit and
146. comes the measured CT current value regardless of the output ON OFF status The current value at output OFF is fixed at 0 0A The following shows the functional block diagram of the CT current transformer input CT type Setting Setup C36 C39 Operation Heater burnout detection Operation Current value measurement Monitoring of output status ON OFF Setting Setup C37 C40 Wait before measurement Setting Setup C38 C41 Output is OFF Current value at output ON Current value at output OFF 0A Output is ON Current value at output ON Current value at output OFF g Handling Precautions The current value at output ON is used when the operation type of the Internal Event is set at heater burnout over current The current value at output OFF is used when the operation type of the Internal Event is set at heater short circuit 5 69 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E CT type A desired operation type can be set for each of CT input 1 or CT input 2 CT1 operation type w 2 0 Heater burnout detection Simple Setup setting Setup bank L 441 4 current value measurement Standard CT2 operation type cr 11 High function Setup setting Setup bank f e When the optional model has two CT input points the display and setting can be made e When the CT type is set at current value measurement the current value at output ON is updated regardless of the out
147. control dead l A 100 0 to 100 0 0 0 Simple zone L LN Standard Setup setting Setup bank High function Heat Cool change point H Pd J 10 0 to 110 0 50 0 High function Setup setting Setup bank 7 The following shows the Heat Cool control calculation PID heat PID cool o Heat cool aA change point T PID heat PID cool Constants P I d rE Constants oL oH Constants oL oH PV PID control i Heat Cool output Heat MV Fixed at Wa j MV calculation euin reverse action PID control result Heat Cool control dead zone Heat Cool control change point 5 15 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION e When using the Heat Cool control C26 1 the display and setting can be made e When MV 50 the control is changed to the PID heat e When MV lt 50 the control is changed to the PID cool e When the heat cool change is set at energy saving C27 1 the heat cool change is suppressed to indirectly obtain the energy saving effect However when the heat cool dead zone C28 is less than 0 0 the energy saving effect cannot be obtained e How the relationship between the output heat and output cool is made for the PID control result MV is set Dead zone 100 0 100 0 100 0 a 100 0 Cool MV HeatMV Cool MV EE Heat MV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
148. control output 2 is not isolated When necessary use an appropriate isolator Do not connect multiple loader cables to multiple units from one personal computer The current coming from other circuits might cause the PV value indication error to occur Do not connect any terminating resistor to both ends of the communication path when performing the RS 485 wiring Doing so might cause the communication to fail Always mount a switch for shut down of the main power of this unit in an easily accessible area of the operator when performing electric wiring of this unit Additionally connect a slow action type T fuse having a rated current of 0 2A and rated voltage of 250V to the wiring for the instrument power supply of the AC power supply model IEC127 Q Q Q Q Q 9 Q Q 9 Q Chapter 4 WIRING E Terminal assignment label symbols The following table shows the meanings of the symbols used for the terminal assignment label attached to the side panel of this unit AC Caution Electric shock hazard Caution E Wiring precautions e Before starting the wiring work carefully check the label on the side panel of this unit to understand the model No and terminal No to carry out the wiring properly For panel mount type use an appropriate crimp type terminal lug suitable for the M3 screw to connect the terminals The tightening torque of the terminal screw must be 0 4 to 0 6N m For socket mount ty
149. ct 2 Operation type 5413 rf Internal Contact 2 Input bit function 5414 ff Internal Contact 2 Input assign A 5415 im Internal Contact 2 Input assign B 5416 i Internal Contact 2 Input assign C 5417 Ff Internal Contact 2 Input assign D 5418 OT Internal Contact 2 Polarity A 5419 OT 5 Internal Contact 2 Polarity B 5420 Ft Internal Contact 2 Polarity C 5421 Ff Internal Contact 2 Polarity D 5422 OT Internal Contact 2 Polarity 5423 OoOo Internal Contact 2 Event channel def 5424 OT Internal Contact 3 Operation type 5425 OoOo Internal Contact 3 Input bit function 5426 OT Internal Contact 3 Input assign A 5427 OoOo Internal Contact 3 Input assign B OT Internal Contact 3 Input assign C OoOo Internal Contact 3 Input assign D OT Internal Contact 3 Polarity A OoOo Internal Contact 3 Polarity B 5432 1538 21816 5538 OT Internal Contact 3 Polarity C 5433 1539 21817 5539 OoOo Internal Contact 3 Polarity D 5434 153A 21818 sa a Le a a E ees a i e ie tT ee aes Internal Contact 3 Polarity 5435 1538 21819 558 Internal Contact 3 Event channel def 5436 1530 21820 sssc DO Control output 1 Operation type 5601 15E1 21985 5561 Assignment Control output 1 Output assign A 5602 15E2 21986 55E2 Control output 1 Output assign B 5603 15E3 21987 5563 Control output 1 Output assign C 5604
150. d SP lag constant 0 0 to 999 9 Bie p Proportional band 0 00 to 99 99 EA tuning factor at AT Integral time adjust 0 00 to 99 99 AL d AT Derivative time 0 00 to 99 99 1 00 2 adjust EEA om algorithm 0 PID Conventional PID 1 Ra Ane High Serer ces PID Se FITTER 0 to 100 overshoot suppression factor ST Self tuning step 0 00 to 99 99 10 00 Displayed when the control Scien resolution method is other than the band ON OFF control CtrL 0 and ST Self tuning step 0 00 to 10 00 0 50 oe method is ST settling band de ST Self tuning 0 00 to 10 00 1 00 hunting settling band ST Self tuning 0 ST is executed when the PV step ramp change moves up or down 1 ST is executed only when the PV moves up Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA 6 3 List of Setup Setting Displays The following shows the meanings of the values stated in the User Level column 0 Simple Standard or High function configuration 1 Standard or High function configuration and 2 High function configuration Initial value may depending on model No E Setup bank Bank selection 5 p onl thermocouple T 1 to 6 9 to 11 13 Input Range Table on page to 21 24 25 5 2 When the PV input type is RTD R 41 41 to 46 51 to 54 63 64 67 68 When the PV input type is DC 88 voltage DC current L 84 86 to 90 2 Temperature unit 0 Celsius C Displayed when the PV input g 1 Fahrenheit F type is thermoco
151. d as four X n n is a positive integer hexadecimal digits The write start data address four hexadecimal digits and the write data count four X n hexadecimal digits are sent e Writing of single data item wol iil i M 3 e Writing of multiple data items woj Ne i 1 2 3 4 5 1 Fixed length continuous data write command 2 Start data word address 3 Data 1 4 Data 2 to data n 1 5 Data n If writing is successful the normal termination code two decimal digits is returned If only part of the data is written and the remaining data is not written the warning termination code two decimal digits is returned If none of the data is written the abnormal termination code two decimal digits is returned e Normal termination 0 0 1 e Abnormal termination or warning The abnormal termination code is entered at XX C gt List of Termination Codes on page 7 14 1 Termination code Maximum read data count per message RAM area Up to 27 words EEPROM area Up to 16 words 7 9 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Fixed length random data read command RU command This command reads random non continuous data in two byte units Send message The data address four hexadecimal digits of the data to be read is sent in the specified order UO ol ey 1 2 3 4 5 1 Fixed length random data write command 2 Sub commanad fixed to 00 3 Data address 1
152. d when the optional Operation type type model has Event output 3 0 Default output When using Event output 3 1 MV1 the default output is Internal 2 MV2 Event 3 3 to 6 Function 1 to 4 Event output 3 Same as Control output 1 Output Displayed when the optional Output assign A assign A to D model has Event output 3 Event output 3 0 to 49 cs ie eee at of Output assign B vent output 3 is function to 4 Ev3 1 gt 2 Event output 3 Output assign C Event output 3 Output assign D Event output 3 Same as Control output 1 Polarity A 0000 2 Polarity A to D to D 1st digit Polarity A The following setting applies to each 2nd digit Polarity B digit 3rd digit Polarity C 0 Direct Ath digit Polarity D 1 Reverse Event output 3 0 Direct Polarity 1 Reverse Event output 3 0 None Latch 1 Latch Latch at ON 2 Latch Latch at OFF except for initialization at power ON 6 22 E User Function bank Bank selection HH E Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level User Function 1 User Function 2 User Function 3 User Function 4 User Function 5 User Function 6 User Function 7 User Function 8 E Lock bank I JE Bank selection 4 Loader lock Each setting is set on the upper pde 7 The following shows the setting exceptions Not registered Proportional band of currently used PID group Integral time of currently used PID g
153. decimal digits is returned If only part of the data is written and the remaining data is not written the warning termination code two decimal digits is returned If none of the data is written the abnormal termination code two decimal digits is returned e Normal termination olo 1 e Abnormal termination or warning The abnormal termination code is entered at XX 1 gt List of Termination Codes on page 7 14 1 Termination code Maximum write data count per message Up to 14 words for both RAM and EEPROM area 7 11 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 4 Definition of Word Addresses RAM and EEPROM areas of word addresses Word addresses are categorized as follows Word address Name Remarks hexadecimal notation 273W to 14859W RAM access word address Reading and writing of these addresses are 0111 to 3A0B are both performed on RAM Since writing is not performed to EEPROM the value returns to that stored in EEPROM when the power is turned OFF then ON again 16657W to 31243W EEPROM access word address Writing is performed to both RAM and 4111 to 7AOB EEPROM reading is performed only on RAM Since writing is also performed to EEPROM the value does not change even when the power is turned OFF then ON again B Handling Precautions The number of times that EEPROM can be rewritten is limited 100 000 operations Accordingly we recommend writing parameters that are rewritt
154. ded explanation 2 item added MMV scaling range added Old 5 68 5 69 pages MNumber of CT turns and number of CT power wire loops added Old 5 70 to 5 84 pages Timer remain time Internal event remaining time changed CYU CY CYU2 CY2 Remarks changed C43 contents 10 11 added C46 C51 added Handling Precautions added C90 to C93 added Handling Precautions added Display E1 C1 Contents 33 added Handling Precautions added Control output 1 2 MV scaling added Note 1 added RAM address Decimal No 5290 to 5293 added Note 2 Note 3 added CT Current transformer current value 2 RAM EEPROM Write x added Alarm displays and corrective action AL11 added Handling Precautions added Indication accuracy explanation added Diameter of the applicable thermocouple or compensating wire added Current transformer input changed Non detected power failure time added Printed Manual Number Edition Revised pages date May 2006 CP SP 1148E Section 4 2 Recommended Cables added E PV input range type this item transferred from page 5 2 PV range tables totally changed Explanation 1 item changed Handling Precautions changed Explanation changed Note added Table added in the two item of Handling Precautions Graph of W MV scaling range changed E User Function bank explanation added Note added to the W Key lock communications lock and loader lock Table of W User Function bank Contents item explanation add
155. e Notwithstanding the foregoing any failure falling under one of the following shall not be covered under this warranty 1 Failure caused by your improper use of Yamatake product noncompliance with conditions environment of use precautions etc set forth in catalogs specifications instruction manuals etc 2 Failure caused for other reasons than Yamatake product 3 Failure caused by any modification or repair made by any person other than Yamatake or Yamatake s subcontractors 4 Failure caused by your use of Yamatake product in a manner not conforming to the intended usage of that product 5 Failure that the state of the art at the time of Yamatake s shipment did not allow Yamatake to predict or 6 Failure that arose from any reason not attributable to Yamatake including without limitation acts of God disasters and actions taken by a third party Please note that the term warranty as used herein refers to equipment only warranty and Yamatake shall not be liable for any damages including direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of Yamatake products 2 Ascertainment of suitability You are required to ascertain the suitability of Yamatake product in case of your use of the same with your machinery equipment etc hereinafter referred to as Equipment on your own responsibility taking the following matters into consideration 1 Regulations and standards or laws th
156. e H 1 f 1 feta Stopper Socket E Panel cutout dimensions For panel mounting type make the mounting holes according to the panel hole making dimensions Unit mm Stand alone mounting Gang mounting 30 min 45 3 l go 48xN 3 25 Se ee ee 5 lt lo l A So amp gaa ee Revere ESETE aren eo ere L E F oO i 9 i i N shows the number of mounting units C Handling Precautions e When three or more units are gang mounted horizontally the maximum allowable ambient temperature is 40 C e Provide a space of at least 50 mm or more above and below the controller 3 2 Chapter 3 INSTALLATION E Mounting procedures e The mounting must be horizontal within 10 degrees tilted in back side lowering or within 10 degrees tilted in back side rising e In the case of panel mount type C15T the mounting panel should be used with a thickness of less than 9 mm of firm board C15T Panel mount type Items to be prepared Phillips head screwdriver Mounting bracket Panel hole Screws for Gasket Accessory mounting bracket Main body The above Figure shows the waterproof mounting using the gasket The gasket is not used for normal panel mounting 1 Insert this unit from the front of the panel 2 Fit the mounting bracket from the back of the panel 3 Push the mounting bracket against the panel until the hook of the mounting bracket is firmly
157. e control when the continuous output of this controller is connected to the RSP remote SP of another controller with this controller as master and the other controller as slave Set the RSP range to MV scaling range which changes in proportion to a change in the MV 0 100 of this controller e f ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank z is prior to version 2 04 neither SP MV nor PV MV can be selected as an output type The MV scaling range is not displayed and cannot be set 5 68 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 13 CT Current Transformer Input For CT input two kinds of current values are provided Current value at output ON This current value is used for the heater burnout over current event This current value is displayed as CT current value e Current value at output OFF This current value is used for the heater short circuit event This current value cannot be displayed When CT type is set at heater burnout detection C36 0 or C39 0 the following operation is performed The current value at output ON becomes the CT current value measured when the output specified in CT output is turned ON The current value at output OFF becomes the CT current value measured when the output specified in CT output is turned OFF When CT type is set at current value measurement C36 1 or C39 1 the following operation is performed The current value at output ON be
158. e een cece eee ceeeceeees 3 1 E External GIMGNSIONSG lt 6scccceiicissccccceisessesetasceedeawseweaneweees 3 2 H Panel cutout GIMENSIONS cece ccc esc cece cee cec ee ceessceeceees 3 2 E Mounting procedures eee ee eee cece cece reece eee e nce necenees 3 3 Vii Chapter 4 WIRING AA Wirth esdicatessipeessedsacsesisnentctanesecaandexs deans lt eaaca denveeaanneaes 4 1 E Terminal assignment label symbols Pree ey Cee ree 4 2 M Wiring precautions cece eee cece cece cece renee eee e ee eeeenees 4 2 E Connection of open collector output to digital input 4 5 mM Connection of communication RS 485 cable sseeeeee eee 4 5 E Connection with solid state relay SSR esses eee rece eee eeee 4 7 E Connection with current input type controllers 4 10 HM Noise preventive measures iii E E E E 4 10 4 2 Recommended Cables lt s s csrisiscsicsincsiesescricicsennesessciaisiecea 4 11 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION SA PY Mpt tecaetecctestorsicorsenentieecke O A AE 5 1 E PV input range type s esssseseessssoessssesoseseosossesossseoeoes 5 1 E Temperature unit E EEEE LTE ETET 5 3 M Cold junction compensation T C sssssssssssssssessssesseseses 5 3 E PV square root extraction dropout eee cece cece cece eee eeeeee 5 3 E Decimal point position E E E T SEisikipkerhkissis 5 4
159. e out occurs the instruction message is resent Transmission start time A wait time of 10ms is required before the master station starts to transmit the next instruction message to the same slave station or a different slave station after the end of receiving response message 2 in the figure below e RS 485 3 wire system 1 2 Instruction Response Instruction Response message message message message 1 Transmis sion line 1 End of master station transmission Transmission start time of slave station Max 2000ms 2 End of slave station transmission Transmission start time of master station Min 10ms E RS 485 driver control timing specifications When the transmission reception on the RS 485 3 wire system is directly controlled by the master station care should be paid to the following timing 1 Master station Driver control enable oS Transmission Effective Effective line data i data instruction response Slave station message message Driver control disable enable 3 End of master End of slave station transmission station transmission 1 End of master station transmission Driver disable time Max 500 s 2 End of slave station reception Driver enable time Response time out Setup setting C70 or greater 3 End of slave station transmission Driver disable time Max 10ms 4 End of master station reception Driver enable time Min 10
160. ed DC current input Allowable input current Max 30mA added Dust proof and drip proof performance to degrees of protection changed Dec 2006 i APPLICABLE STANDARDS EN61326 1changed to EN61326 Flow chart for Input bit function is not used polarity added Contents No 6 of W Output type PV SP added Initial value of C32 0 changed to 1 Contents of ROM ID 0 fixed Applicable standards EN61326 1 changed to EN61326 May 2007 6th Edition jii SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ll Examples changed Sep 2007 7th Edition i Description on SDC15 Quick Reference Guide added SDC15 Quick Reference Guide added Remarks of item input alarm status Description added Allowable input voltage added July 2008 8th Edition CP UM 5287E to CP UM 5287JE changed ON terminal voltage to ON terminal current changed July 2009 RESTRICTIONS ON USE deleted i Standards compliance EN61326 changed to EN61326 1 Parameter bank note 1 was changed Description of key operation corrected Installation locations item added Connection with current input type controllers section added SP ramp unit section was moved to page 5 30 SP ramp up ramp down Explanation added SP low limit high limit section was moved to page 5 31 E Compiling section added Running the sample program section added Prosessing of the sample program sections were moved from page 7 16 e Thermocouple T C input e Resistance temperature detector
161. ed and set 5 7 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E AT Auto Tuning stop start The AT stop start selection can be set AT Auto Tuning stop start Ak L At oF AT stop Communication value is 0 At oF Simple Parameter setting Mode At ON AT start Communication value is 1 Standard bank High function e The AT is stopped in the MANUAL or READY mode e If the PV high limit alarm AL01 or PV low limit alarm AL02 occurs the AT is stopped e If the operation type of internal contacts 1 to 3 is set at AT stop start At AT stop start can be displayed but the setting cannot be made e When CtrL Control method is set at 0 ON OFF control At AT stop start cannot be displayed and set e When bit 3 AT stop start display of C73 MODE display setup is set at 0 no display At AT stop start cannot be displayed and set gt AT on page 5 18 and AT function on page 5 21 Release all DO digital output latches Release all DO digital output latches can be set Release all DO digital Lt ON Latch is continued Communication Simple output latches I value is O Standard Parameter setting Mode Lt oF Latch is released Communication High function bank value is 1 e If the operation type of internal contacts 1 to 3 is set at Release all DO latches do Lt Release all DO latches can be displayed but the setting cannot be made e When bit 4 Release all DO la
162. ed faaas TF WU comnaide 40655 bebeede keer eeedeseuausave Jell WU GOA 66 essed vevrteeweesancase atipi Tell Index 4 Revision History Printed Manual Number Edition Revised pages date Nov 2003 OPSP HWAGE a l 1 6 4 2 5 2 5 26 5 34 6 17 6 18 5 40 5 41 7 4 4 5 4 7 4 8 to 4 10 5 6 5 10 5 16 5 54 5 66 5 68 5 69 5 70 5 71 5 72 5 73 to 5 84 6 1 6 6 6 10 The tightening torque of the terminal screw 0 4Nem 0 4 to 0 6Nem changed Handling Precautions item added When PV alarm occurrence and recovery are frequently repeated added Event channel def Contents corrected 0 Invalid Every Internal Event 1 to 5 Internal Event number added Operation type Heater 1 2 burnout Over current Heater 1 2 short circuit an annotation added List of data link layer data definitions Sub address Character code 00 30H 30H corrected eResistance temperature detector RTD input Allowable wiring resistance and Influence of wiring resistance added eDC voltage input Input impedanse added Other specifications Over voltage category EN664 1 IEC60664 4 changed Caution added Digital input circuit diagram changed Yamatake s PGM10N PGM10F series added Old 4 7 to 4 9 pages MPV hold explanation added C19 C20 C15 C16 changed Change point gt 50 0 changed Contents 44 ALO1 to AL99 added Contents 45 ALO1 to ALO3 added MOutput type Contents No 10 11 ad
163. eee ween 2 Control subject of interference system 5 26 Controller aati OR asaxcsxvsiondisecenasausava 5 47 CPL communications 445006 sadndsersicacarsans Fal CR filter ccsccccccsccccccvcccccsccvseecs 4 10 Crimp type tetihinal 526 wir ereawer cree 4 4 CT current transformer input 2 1 5 69 CT display setip kacci hiss ures cane neerenanaaa 5 75 CT input calibration s s ssriserrsriscesersssss 114 CT Measurement wait HME siss scressricrssiss 5 70 CT Operation typ e s sesesirresersrressssressi 5 70 CT output eee ere 5 70 Current output calibration ssssssssessssss 11 5 Current output ssseesssseessesreeserreesses 5 66 Current transformer input ssssssrrrrrrrsreee 2 1 Current transformer srrsrissriidstnrii kdeinit 1 3 D Data formal xiccseeersdodare ces Aa EnD AEE R 7 1 Data link layer sssssssssresesssreessereceses 7 3 Data setting procedures sssssserrererrerre 2 6 Decimal point position eeeee eens 5 1 5 4 Delay Unit sees cece cece cece cere eee e ees 5 47 Derivative UME cisiveciciacviassrsecdicandias en 5 14 Deviation high limit seseseeeeeees 5 39 Deviation high low limit s eeeeeeeees 5 39 Deviation low Umit sisisscacnscercracscaacaan lt 5 39 Device ID Code ic icsaddsceictciceasacasoias 9 3 7 4 Di siesta tssceauevatanrineeavesteaanesuckawe 5232 Digital ipl scares essen eceeyen 2 1 4 5 5 8 5 32 Digital output esses eee e eee e
164. efault output voltage pulse output 1 MV1 When using control output 2 2 MV2 the default output is MV2 3 to 6 Function 1 to 4 Same as Control output 1 Output Displayed when control assign A to D output 2 of the model is 0 to 49 voltage pulse output and the Output assign B operation type of control output 2 is function 1 to 4 Control output 2 ot2 1 gt 2 Output assign C Control output 2 Control output 2 Output assign D Control output 2 Same as Control output 1 Polarity A Polarity A to D to D 1st digit Polarity A The following setting applies to each 2nd digit Polarity B digit 3rd digit Polarity C 0 Direct 4th digit Polarity D 1 Reverse Control output 2 0 None Latch 1 Latch Latch at ON 2 Latch Latch at OFF except for initialization at power ON Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Event output 1 Same as Control output 1 Operation Displayed when the optional Operation type type model has Event output 1 0 Default output When using Event output 1 1 MV1 the default output is Internal 2 MV2 Event 1 3 to 6 Function 1 to 4 Same as Control output 1 Output Displayed when the optional assign A to D model has Event output 1 0 to 49 and the operation type of Event output 1 is function 1 to 4 Ev1 1 gt 2 Event output 1 Output assign B Event output 1 Output assign C Event output 1 Output assign D Event output 1
165. efined 14 MV1 15 MV2 16 to 17 Undefined 18 DI1 19 DI2 20 to 25 Undefined 26 Internal Contact 1 27 Internal Contact 2 28 Internal Contact 3 29 to 33 Undefined Communication DI1 Communication DI2 Communication DI3 Communication DI4 MANUAL mode READY mode Undefined AT running During SP ramp Undefined Undefined mode key pressing status Event output 1 status Control output 1 status High function Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Event output 2 Output assign A Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 2 Output assign B Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 2 Output assign C Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 2 Output assign D Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 3 Output assign A Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 3 Output assign B Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 3 Output assign C Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 3 Output assign D Setup setting DO Assignment bank Same as that on the previous page e When the object control output is the relay output or voltage pulse output and the operation type of the DO Assignment is set for output bit functions 1 to 4 the display and setting can be made e When the object event output is provided and the operation type of the DO Assignment is set for output bit functions to 4 the display and sett
166. ement for similar reasons azbil Yam at ake Corporation Specifications are subject to change without notice 08 Advanced Automation Company 1 12 2 Kawana Fujisawa Kanagawa 251 8522 Japan URL http www azbil com 1st Edition Issued in Nov 2003 W 10th Edition Issued in June 2011 M
167. en extremely frequently to RAM that can be infinitely rewritten to Note however that when writing to RAM is performed the data in EEPROM is transferred to RAM when the power is turned ON again Write data range If the write value exceeds the range determined by parameters writing is not performed and an abnormal termination code is returned Write conditions An abnormal termination code is also returned when the writing is not possible due to the conditions Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 5 Numeric Representation in the Application Layer The specifications of numeric representation are decimal variable length zero suppress for RS and WS commands and hexadecimal fixed length for RD WD RU and WU commands Details are as follows RS and WS commands Unwanted space Cannot be appended The message processing is aborted Cannot be appended and an abnormal termination code Numerical value zero Cannot be omitted Be sure to use 0 Other unwanted Numerical values may be prefixed is returned as a response message characters with a expressing a negative number Any other character cannot be appended The sign must not be appended to indicate positive numerical values Range of available 32768 to 32767 numerical values Values out of this range are not allowed RD WD RU and WU commands Cannot be appended The message processing is aborted Cannot be appended and an abnormal te
168. ent to hold OFF state Operation specifications The direct action is used for the heat control and is turned ON in the following cases e The increase in PV becomes smaller than the main setting after the diagnosis time ON delay time has elapsed after the MV had reached the high limit e The decrease in PV becomes smaller than the main setting after the diagnosis time ON delay time has elapsed after the MV had reached the low limit The reverse action is used for the cool control and is turned ON in the following cases e The decrease in PV becomes smaller than the main setting after the diagnosis time ON delay time has elapsed after the MV had reached the high limit e The increase in PV becomes smaller than the main setting after the diagnosis time ON delay time has elapsed after the MV had reached the low limit In the following cases the event is turned OFF with the priority over the above conditions e The absolute value of the deviation PV SP becomes less than the sub setting However the event is turned OFF when the absolute value of the deviation is less than the sub setting hysteresis value after the absolute value of the deviation has become the sub setting or more e A period of time after the operation has been started by power ON is less than the OFF delay time CAUTION When setting the ON delay and OFF delay it is necessary to put in High function configuration The default settings of the ON delay and OFF delay be
169. epending on the model In case of the independent contacts the output and the output 2 are isolated Environment conditions e Standard conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C Ambient humidity 60 5 RH Power supply voltage AC power model 105Vac 1 50 60Hz 1Hz DC power model 24Vac 1 50 60Hz 1Hz 24Vdc 5 Vibration Om s Shock Om s Mounting angle Reference plane 3 e Operating conditions Ambient temperature 0 to 50 C 0 to 40 C for tight mounting Ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH No condensation allowed Power supply voltage AC power model 85 to 264Vac 50 60Hz 2Hz Rating 100 to 240Vac 50 60Hz DC power model 21 6 to 26A Vac 50 60Hz 2Hz 21 6 to 52 8Vdc Rating 24Vac 50 60Hz 24 to 48Vdc Vibration 0 to 2m s 10 to 60Hz for 2 hrs in each of the X Y and Z direction Shock 0 to 10m s Mounting angle Reference plane 10 e Transportation conditions Ambient temperature 20 to 70 C Ambient humidity 10 to 95 RH No condensation allowed 13 4 Other specifications Degrees of protection Power consumption Altitude Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Inrush current at power ON Non detected power failure time Mass Terminal screw tightening torque Applicable standards Over voltage category Allowable pollution degree Decoration sheet material color Case material color Mounting bracket For C15T Current transformer Hole diameter 5 8mm
170. eration display if necessary press mode once to get the operation display When v or A is i pressed Ak oF flashes Press para twice The upper display gz says and the lower aepley says a s Aor Flashing occurs only in aie A RUN and AUTO modes if there is no PV input abnormality Also if AT stop start is O lt If the control method is ON OFF control and if Bit 3 AT stop start display of the mode display setting C73 i is set to disabled 0 nothing is displayed selected for DI assign ment the display does not blink and no change can be made starts to flash Press A once The lower display AL aa Tun If no key is pressed for more than 2s am remains steadi ly lit and AT begins During AT the right most decimal point flashes twice re peatedly When AT is done the light goes off and the new PID values go into effect During the AT process if the mode is changed to READY or MANUAL if PV input is faulty or if a power failure occurs AT stops automatically without changing the PID values AT can also be stopped by changing the setting from Fit on to Az aF return to step 3 above Setup of SP value D 4 Start from the operation display if necessary press mode once to get the opera tion display Check that the operation display is displaying the SP If not press para repeatedly until the SP is displayed
171. ernal Contact 2 Same as Internal Contact 1 Input bit 2 When using internal contact Input bit function function 2 the default input is DI 0 Not used Default input digital input 2 1 to 4 Function 1 to 4 Internal Contact 2 Same as Internal Contact Input Displayed when internal Input assign A assign A to D contact 2 Input bit function is Internal Contact 2 0 to 33 function 1 to 4 dl2 220 Input assign B Internal Contact 2 Input assign C Internal Contact 2 Input assign D Internal Contact 2 Same as Internal Contact 1 Polarity Polarity A to D Ato D 1st digit Polarity A The following setting applies to each 2nd digit Polarity B digit 3rd digit Polarity C 0 Direct 4th digit Polarity D 1 Reverse Internal Contact 2 0 Every Internal Event 2 Displayed when the Event channel def 1 to 5 Internal Event No operation type of internal contact 2 is timer stop start dl2 1 17 Internal Contact 3 Same as Internal Contact 1 Operation type Operation type 0 to 20 Internal Contact 3 Same as Internal Contact 1 Input bit 2 When using internal contact Input bit function function 3 the default input is invalid 0 Not used Default input 1 to 4 Function 1 to 4 6 17 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Internal Contact 3 Same as Internal Contact Input Displayed when internal Input assign A assign A to D contact 3 Input bit function is In
172. es are set If the PID constant values become incorrect follow the steps below to reset them 1 Return the PID constants to their default values Make the settings so that proportional band P 1 5 0 integration time I 1 120s and derivative time d 1 30s 2 Start the ST or set the PID constants using the AT function and then start the ST Control subject of interference system There are adjacent control subjects in the horizontal and vertical directions Each temperature change adversely affects the mutual ST functions and the response latency of the control may be delayed In this case the unit is operated with the control method set at Fixed PID CtrL 1 Control subject producing external disturbance intermittently If the customer s system produces the temperature drop intermittently such as sealing of the wrapping machine this may affect the ST adversely In this case the unit is operated with the control method set at Fixed PID CtrL 1 Control subject producing external disturbance intermittently When PV alarm occurrence and recovery are frequently repeated If PV alarm and recovery are frequently repeated while ST is running it is judged as a hunting And the PID parameters may be changed When this status happens during instrumentation set this unit to READY mode or set not to use the ST Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 7 SP The following show
173. etting item can be displayed but the setting cannot be made e When the PV input type is L DC voltage DC current the display and setting can be made The following describes the relationship between the PV input and PV when setting up the range low limit and high limit t t PV PV High limit a High limit Low limit Low limit K i Input 7 Input 10 0 100110 10 0 100110 Low limit lt High limit Low limit gt High limit E PV ratio and PV bias The PV ratio and PV bias can be set to compensate the PV PV ratio A 0 001 to 9 999 1 000 Standard Parameter High function setting Parameter bank PV bias 1999 to 9999 U Simple Parameter Standard setting Parameter bank High function e Details of PV ratio and PV bias controls Assuming that the control input is PVin control result is PVout PV ratio is RA and PV bias is BI the following control formula is obtained PVout PVin X RA BI Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E PV filter This PV filter is a primary delay filter to be used if the PV repeatedly fluctuates rapidly and the control cannot be performed or if the PV fluctuates finely due to influence of noise etc As a larger value is set it becomes difficult to change the PV used for the control of this unit Normally the PV filter is used with an initial value of 0 0 PV filter Cc 0 0 No filter Simple Parameter pk 0 1 to 120 0s Standard setting Para
174. evel this might cause damage to this unit e The input of the current transformer cannot be used for the phase angle control e For panel mounting type C15T an optional terminal cover is available to prevent electric shock Model No 81446898 001 Concave part of main body case Terminal cover 4 2 Wiring of C15T Relay Chapier 4 WIRING e The part between the control output 1 and control output 2 is not isolated When necessary use an appropriate isolator e Do not connect any terminating resistor to both ends of the RS 485 communication path Doing so might cause the communication to fail e Devices and systems to be connected to this unit must have the basic insulation suitable for the maximum operating voltage levels of the power supply and input output part e This unit is so designed that it does not start functioning for up to 6 sec after the power has been turned ON in order to ensure stable operation After that the unit then enters the operation mode However to satisfy the specified accuracy it is necessary to warm up the unit for at least 30 min Control output t Voltage pulse Voltage pulse Current Voltage pulse Voltage pulse Current Current Current Thermocouple RTD Current Voltage Relay Relay independent contact AC Model 100 to 240Vac DC Model 24Vac 24 to 4
175. ff 0 Normally Off 0 Normally Off 0 Polarity C 0 Direct Polarity D 0 Direct Polarity 1 Reverse Event channel def Note The internal DI No is indicated at the mark of x shown in the Display column Setting points The timer startup conditions are set to logical AND of DI and temperature attainment Internal Event 2 Deviation high limit The mode RUN READY selection is used as conditions for logical AND of the A contact of DI1 and the B contact of the timer However since the mode is the READY mode when the contact is ON it is reversed in the final stage of internal contact 2 DI Assignment Internal Contact 1 Input Output port setup Input Output port setup Function Function Function3 Function4 A 2 DN 11 Internal event2 Setup 4 Deviation high li v Internal Contac ha 1B G 1tc 1D 0 Normally open normallh off 0 1 Normally closed normally on 1 he C D Logical AND of DI1 and deviation high limit event Timer start up contact 5 62 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION DI Assignment Internal Contact 2 Input Output port setup Input Output port setup Function Function2 Function3 Function4 A B 2 DN 11 Internal event2 Setup 4 Deviation high liv Internal Contac ne E o FD 0 Normally 0 v0 Normally open normally C D Logical AND of DI1 A contact Reversed at this point
176. first byte of the station address I 31H second byte of the station address 0 30H first byte of the sub address 0 30H second byte of the sub address X 58H device ID code R 52H first byte of the command S 53H second byte of the command omitted ETX 03H 1 Add the character codes in the message from STX through ETX in single byte units The add operation in single byte units is as follows 02H 30H 31H 30H 30H 58H 52H 53H 03H Assume that the result is 376H 2 The low order one byte of the addition result 376H is 76H The 2 s complement of 76H is 8AH 3 Convert the obtained 8AH to a two byte ASCII code The result is 8 38H A 41H and the two bytes 8 38H and A 41H are the checksum e CR LF This indicates the end of the message Immediately after LF is received the device enters a state allowed to process the received message E Application layer The table below shows the configuration of the application layer Command RS decimal number format continuous address data read command WS decimal number format continuous address data write command RD hexadecimal number format continuous address data read command WD hexadecimal number format continuous address data write command RU hexadecimal number format random address data read command WU hexadecimal number format random address data write command Data delimiter RS WS comma
177. for 2 sec or longer 2 5 Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS E Data setting procedures 2 6 1 Operate the para key to display desired data to be set How to operate the para key is described in the previous section Flow of general key operation oes This Figure shows the display This Figure shows the display when setting the PV range type of when setting the RUN Ready the setup setting C01 selection in the parameter setting rt v 2 Press any of the lt v and a keys gt gt When the display No 2 shows a numeric value the 1st digit starts flashing Additionally when the display No 2 shows a character string the entire character string starts flashing When a numeric value is displayed the value can be increased or decreased or the flashing digit can be moved using the lt v or a key When a character string is displayed the entire nee character string can be changed using the v or a key p a pv Ld I 7 7 Xx Y sp y l ral l Ny l 7 ub AR re This Figure shows the display This Figure shows the display when the 1st digit of 0001 is when the entire character string flashing rUn is flashing 3 Release the key and wait for a while gt gt After 2 sec have elapsed the flashing display is stopped and then the data you have changed is set l pv a L l Z en l
178. fore shipment are 0 0s PV to be used Heat control Cool control 4 PV to be used as reference PV Main setting 0 or more Area satisfying Main setting it naitions 1 as reference j Cor mare me ain setting HYS PV to be used ei 0 or more as reference tions 4 RV tobe used as reference Time EG ooo t MV MV High limit High limit Area satisfying _ conditions Low limit Low limit Conditions 3 ON delay set time m ON Conditions 3 ON delay set time O Conditions 3 Conditions 3 ON delay ON delay set time ON set time N Ev EV Time ON delay is started when conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied Time ON delay is started when conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied 5 43 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Operation type Alarm status READY status MANUAL status During AT Status During SP ramp Control action status ST setting standby status Invalid Timer status High and low limits 3 Invalid in this unit of MFB value ON OFF status is undetermined 5 44 Set value of operation type 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 3 Direct action ON if alarm occurs alarm code ALO1 to 99 OFF in other cases ON in the READY mode OFF in the RUN mode ON in the MANUAL mode OFF in the
179. g of the numerical value implies that it is not yet set A numerical setting that is being changed flashes the same way The proportional band can be set in a range from 0 1 to 999 9 If no key is pressed for more than 2s the displayed value is set and the display changes am from flashing to continuously lit If the mode key is pressed when the display is flashing the status returns to that of step 1 Similarly use to set the integral time 0 to 9999s and s i to set the derivative time 0 to 9999s be changed to the desired value for the event In this case the flashing of the numerical value implies that it is not yet set A numerical set ting that is being changed flashes the same way amp on the lower display indicates that the event main set value is zero If no key is pressed for more than 2s the displayed value is set and the display changes from flashing ggg to continuously lit If the mode key is pressed when the display is flashing the status returns to that of step 1 Similarly use F lt to set a value for event 2 and 3 to set a value for event 3 To set hysteresis as well press v twice or press A repeatedly to get F 4H on the upper display and 5 on the lower display When lt v or A is pressed the rightmost digit on the lower display flashes and can be changed to the desired value for hysteresis If no key is pres
180. ge structure Messages are broadly classified into two layers the data link layer and the application layer e Data link layer This layer contains the basic information required for communications such as the destination of the communications message and the check information of the message e Application layer Data is read and written in this layer The content of the layer varies according to the purpose of the message Messages comprise parts 1 to 9 as shown in the figure below The command details sent from the master station and the response details returned from the slave station are stored in the application layer 1 STX start of message 6 ETX end of command response 2 Station address 7 Checksum 3 Sub address 8 CR delimiter 4 Device ID code 9 LF delimiter 5 Send message command response message response The data link layer is of a fixed length The position of each data item and the number of its characters are already decided Note however that the data positions of the data link layer from ETX onwards shift according to the number of characters in the application layer The character length however remains unchanged Response start conditions e The device sends the response message only when 1 message structure station address sub address checksum and message length of a single frame in the data link layer are all correct If even one of these is incorrect no response me
181. h limit Low limit Low limit lt High limit Low limit gt High limit However the output is 0 to 110 in a range of 0 to 20mA 5 67 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E MV scaling range When the control output type is set to either SP MV or PV M V the control output is a continuous output in which the amount of change in the MV is added to the SP or PV Control output 1 MV scaling 7 we 0 to 9999 Simple Setup bank L TA The decimal point position and unit are same Standard as those of the PV input range type High function Auxiliary output MV scaling Setup bank e When the output type of control output 1 control output 2 or the auxiliary output is SP MV or PV MV this item is displayed and can be set e The value calculated by the following formula is output according to the output scaling low high limit settings In case of SP MV MV 50 0 100 0 x MV scaling range SP In case of PV MV MV 50 0 100 0 x MV scaling range PV t SP output 110 4 3 100 J 5 A change of output as aot ail wf ae es ves aw ms emi depend on MV ji I 1 l Input gt i Scaling low limit 0 50 100 Scaling high limit An example of the output type is SP MV A change of MV C Handling Precautions e This function is used for cascad
182. hen clicking Read the zero calibration current is output to the output terminal of the channel you have selected For details about how to connect measuring instruments refer to the following Figures Control output 2 This unit Ammeter Ammeter Keep this status for approximately 30 sec Read the current value in units of 0 001 mA from the ammeter input it in Current mA Voltage V and click Write Select Span from the zero span selection items When clicking Read the span calibration current is output to the output terminal of the channel you have selected Keep this status for approximately 30 sec 10 Read the current value in units of 0 001 mA from the ammeter input it in Current mA Voltage V and click Write 11 If any channels to be calibrated remain return to operation step 2 Chapter 12 DISPOSAL When disposing of this unit dispose of the unit properly as industrial waste according the applicable laws and regulations specified by the local governmental office 12 1 Chapter 13 S E Specifications PV input Input type Sampling cycle time Indication accuracy PV bias e Thermocouple T C input Input bias current Burnout indication Thermocouple or compensating wire Allowablr input voltage PECIFICATIONS Thermocouple K J E T R S B N JIS C1602 1995 PL II Engelhard Industries data ITS90 WRe5 26 ASTM E988 96 Reapproved 2002 D
183. her than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the display mode setup C73 Release all DO Lt on Latch continue All DO latches such as latches Lt oF Latch release control outputs relay and i voltage pulse and event outputs can be released Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the display mode setup C73 Communication DI dl oF OFF Whether or not this item is dl on ON displayed is selected by the display mode setup C73 E SP bank Bank selection 5 p Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level C08 Za z SP of LSP 2 group Displayed when LSP system group C30 is 2 or more oPp F SP of LSP 3 group Displayed when LSP system group C30 is 3 or more oP 4 SP of LSP 4 group Displayed when LSP system group C30 is 4 or more Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA E Event ba nk POREN mi Bank selection j p Display El 6 4 1999 to 9999 The decimal point position may vary Necessary settings are displayed according to Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Internal Event 1 main setting Internal Event 1 sub setting Internal Event 1 Hysteresis Internal Event 1 ON delay time Internal Event 1 OFF delay time Internal Event 2 main setting Internal Event 2 sub setting Internal Event 2 Hysteresis Internal Event 2 ON delay time Internal Event 2 OFF delay time Internal Event 3 main
184. high limit 0 AET Integral time adjust at AT 0 00 to 99 99 1 00 SP Ae a AT Derivative time adjust 0 00 to 99 99 T 00 L5P Display example LSP group number 1 to LSP system group Max 4 1 CEA Control algorithm 0 PID Conventional PID 0 LSP 1st digit the right end digit 1 Ra PID High performance PID PV MV Manipulated Variable 10 0 to 110 0 uF iow dust FiTTER oversheet suppression factor O to 100 0 MV Setting is enabled in MANUAL mode SESA ST step execution resolution band 0 0 to 99 99 10 0 Numeric_value flashed SESE ST step setting band 0 0 to 10 00 0 50 HERE i Heat MV Manipulated Variable Setting is disabled SEHE ST hunting setting band 0 0 to 10 00 T 00 Numeric value 10 0 to 110 0 Shue ST step ramp change 0 ST is executed when the PV moves up or down 0 roor ran Cool MV Manipulated Variable 1 ST is executed only when the PV moves up pee SS AT progress display Setting is disabled 1 Normal Standard control characteristics Immediate response Control characteristics that respond immedi AE Display example 1st digit the right end digit ately to external disturbance Stable Control characteristics having less up down fluctuation of PV Cre CT current value 1 Setting is disabled Numeric value tke CT current value 2 Setting is disabled Numeric value a List of setup setting displays Ef Internal Event 1 main setting 1999 to 9999U or 0 to 9999U 0 Numeric value Ei 5b
185. iTTER overshoot limit resolution width restraint control coefficient ST step settling Just FiTTER width settling band ST hunching settling width MV low limit at AT MV high limit at AT AT Proportional band adjust ST step ramp change AT Integral time adjust AT Derivative time adjust O O OO 0 O OQ O O O O 5 11 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION H Control action and Heat Cool control The control action direct reverse and Heat Cool control enabled disabled can be selected Control action iy 0 Heat control Reverse Simple direct reverse 1 Cool control Direct Standard Setup setting Setup bank High function Heat Cool control 0 Disabled 0 Simple Setup setting Setup bank 1 Enabled Standard High function e When the control method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 Heat Cool control C26 can be displayed and set e When the Heat Cool control is set disabled C26 0 Control action C14 can be displayed and set e When the Heat Cool control is set enabled C26 1 the control action is changed to the reverse action C14 0 the preset MANUAL value C20 is changed to 50 0 and the initial output of PID control C22 is changed to 50 0 e The reverse action heat control is a control that decreases or turns OFF the manipulated variable MV as the PV increases The direct action cool control is a control that i
186. igated in reverse order L 4a 81 F gA E Explanation of arrows T para key i q 2 second press T Ga hold of i para key 9 E Movement through each setup menu para key Forward movement para key lt key Backward movement Operation exam ples a Items before operation Outlined letters Items during operation Setup of PV input range type Setup of PV input range type PV input range type Execution of auto tuning AT of auto tuning Execution of auto tuning AT Start from the operation display mz if necessary press mode once to get the opera tion display Press and hold para for more than 2s to get the parameter setup display F 7 is shown on the upper display If no sensor is connected an alarm for abnormal PV input any one from ALG to AL ii may appear on the upper display In case of ON OFF control r 7 appears on the upper display Press and hold para for more than 2s again to get the setup setting display lt v a The current set When the lt v or a key is pressed the right most digit on the lower display flashes If no key rie value for iti PV input range type is displayed is pressed for more than 2s after changing to the desired value in the PV input range list the display changes from flashing to conti nuously lit and the displayed value is now set Setup
187. imal Cool MV Manipulated Variable 9107 2393 25491 6393 Same as RAM address 14421 decimal Reserved for future extension 9108 2394 25492 6394 Same as RAM address a decimal AT progress 9109 2395 25493 6395 as RAM address as CT Current transformer 9110 2396 25494 6396 X current value 1 14418 decimal CT Current transformer 9111 2397 25495 6397 Same as RAM address current value 2 o ot x i ka 14419 decimal Timer remain time 1 Timer remain time 2 Timer remain time 3 9114 239A 25498 esaa Timer remain time 4 9115 2308 25499 6308 X Timer remain time 5 9116 2390 25500 exc x Reserved for future extension 9117 239D 25501 e390 a Xx Reserved for future extension 9118 239E 25502 es a Xx Reserved for future extension 9119 239F 25503 e30F a Xx Reserved for future extension 9120 230 25504 esao a Xx x Reserved for future extension 9121 23A1 25505 63A1 9122 23A2 25506 63A2 X X X X Reserved for future extension Same as RAM address 14593 decimal Note 2 LSP value in use 9123 23A3 25507 63A3 PV before ratio bias and filter 9124 23A4 25508 63A4 Reserved for future extension 9125 23A5 25509 63A5 Bit 0 ALO1 PV over range Bit 1 ALO1 PV under range Bit 2 ALO3 CJ RTD burnout Bit 10 AL11 CT over range Bits 3 to 9 11 to 15 Undefined Bits
188. imal Same as RAM address 13063 decimal Co ria wer e808 sof f ts 7520 oso es04 sooo sft 9 7 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Event Extended tuning Operation display 9 8 Bank Item name RAM address EEPROM address EEPROM Decimal point Remak S Internal Event 5 main setting 7521 1D61 23905 5D61 Same as RAM address 13064 decimal Event 5 sub setting 7522 1D62 23906 5 Same as RAM address 13065 decimal Event 5 Hysteresis eo mensONdayime 7524 oo ase aoe s _ t FiTTER settling band Ea Reserved for future extension 8505 2139 24889 6139 a x a X AT Proportional band adjust 8506 2 AT nega ime adjust e a a 2_ ATDewvatvetimeadust eos aac vase aio 2 t Control agortm eo o ee oso _ hE ee Just FiTTER overshoot limit restraint 8510 eee ee oh hk ei control coefficient Reserved for future extension 8511 213F 24895 es a x fat xf T Self tuning step execution resolution width 8515 2143 24899 6143 of Self tuning step settling width 8516 2144 24900 6144 ST Self tuning hunching settling bound 8517 2145 24901 6145 ST Self tuning step ramp change 8518 2146 24902 6146 9001 2329 25385 a 9002 2324 25386 632A Reserved for future extension 9003 232B 25387 632B AT stop start 9004 2320 25388 D 5 D
189. ing Sub setting CT2 at output ON gt OFF before measuirng CT2 current value Main setitng Sub setting CT2 at output ON OFF before measuring CT2 current value O HYS ON ON HYS Main setting CT2 at output OFF OFF before measuring CT2 current value Main setting CT2 at output OFF gt OFF before measuring CT2 current value 23 ON if alarm occurs alarm code AL01 to 99 initial value If the main setting is greater than the sub setting operations are performed with the main OFF if alarm occurs alarm code ALO1 to 99 OFF in other cases ON in other cases setting and sub setting automatically swapped Event types other than the above Operation type SP high limit Operation type Loop diagnosis 1 20 Operation type During AT status SP low limit Loop diagnosis 2 21 During SP ramp SP high low limit Loop diagnosis 3 Control action status MV high limit READY status ST setting standby status ROM failure ROM memory is faulty Handling precautions Reset the unit e Replace the unit If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank 22 is prior to 2 04 CT input failure Fit is not displayed MV low limit MANUAL status Timer status MV high low limit Chapter 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview This unit is a compact controller having a mask of 48 X 48 mm and provides the follow
190. ing can be made 5 55 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Polarity of output assign The polarity of four output assigns A B C D used for the output bit function can be set High function Control output 1 Polarity A to D Setup setting DO Assignment bank or Control output 2 Polarity A Lo to D Setup setting DO Oee Assignment bank Event output 1 Polarity A to D Setup setting DO Assignment bank eos output 2 Polarity A to D Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 3 Polarity A to D Setup setting DO Assignment bank Z LLI 5 56 1 The digits are called 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd iO digit and 4th digit from the right end 1st digit Output assign A Polarity setting 2nd digit Output assign B Polarity setting 3rd digit Output assign C Polarity setting 4th digit Output assign D Polarity setting r Am 0 Direct 1 Reverse 0000 e When the object control output is the relay output or voltage pulse output and the operation type of the DO Assignment is set for output bit functions 1 to 4 the display and setting can be made e When the object event output is provided and the operation type of the DO Assignment is set for output bit functions to 4 the display and setting can be made CJ Handling Precautions The output relay may be turned ON and OFF repeatedly at a high speed depending on the conditions To avoid such faulty operation always
191. ing features The depth is only 60 mm providing the excellent space saving The front panel is only 2 mm thick This ensures the excellent thin design The display panel is large This provides excellent visibility mode key para key and digit shift keys are provided on the front panel This ensures easy setup operation Various input types are available thermocouples K J E T R S B N PLU WRe5 26 DIN U DIN L RTDs Pt100 JPt100 current signals 4 to 20mAdc 0 to 20mAdc and voltage signals 0 to 1 Vdc 1 to 5Vdc 0 to 5Vdc and 0 to 10Vdc For control outputs relay voltage pulse and current output are provided Additionally these control outputs can be combined for the 2nd control output The unit can be made applicable to the heat cool control using the 2nd control output and or event relay ON OFF control fixed PID and self tuning control can be performed In addition to the PID control two algorithms RationaLOOP and Just FiTTER are mounted This ensures excellent controllability With optional functions a combination among 3 or 2 event points independent contacts 2 point CT input 2 point digital input and or RS 485 can be selected The personal computer loader port is provided as standard function The setup can be made easily with use of the personal computer loader Use of optional Smart Loader Package SLP C35 makes it possible to easily perform the read write operation of the parameter
192. inuous data write command WD command 7 9 E Fixed length random data read command RU command 7 10 E Fixed length random data write command WU command 7 11 7 4 Definition of Word Addresses eekee eee Renta iceeetebceues 7 12 7 5 Numeric Representation in the Application Laval ween cece cence cece eeees 7 13 7 6 List of Termination Codes i c scscosscissdacscsendassecdadssiansaceaacinn 7 14 7 7 Reception and Transmission Timing esses eee cece eee e cee ees 7 15 E Timing specifications for instruction and response message 7 15 E RS 485 driver control timing specifications se ee 7 15 7 8 Cautions when Making Communications Programs for the Master Stations 00ccccscccsedsaccccesesseessecaeues EEEE 7 16 m Example of communications program sssssssesesesesssseeeee 7 16 Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 8 1 Outline of Communications cece ccc c cece cece eee eecsseeeeees 8 1 M E N E E T 8 1 ME Setup eseseseesesesecseseseoseceseoseceseeseceseosecesececcsseeeeee 8 1 E Communications procedures s sssssssseseeseseeseseseereese 8 2 8 2 Message Structure essssssesssese T E TT ee eee 8 3 M Message Structure see cece cece eee cece cece cee eeeecnceeeees 8 3 E Command type ssssssesssssseessseocoossesosessocossesossseeeoes 8 6 M Other specifications sssseessseoessseesossseocossseossseoe
193. ion can be easily set using visual images as shown below Select the input bit function The image of the ladder is changed according to the selected input bit function Select four input assigns A to D mm Input Output port setup amp Function Function2 Function3 Function4 Internal Contac a 4 bal 1 Normally closed normally on 1 D Select whether or not the polarity is set for Select whether or not the polarity of assigns A to D the bit function is made C Handling Precautions In addition to the selection through the menu the Input port setup window can also be opened using the following procedures Click the input output port setup icon 7 Right click in the input bit function setting window Press the Ctrl and P keys at the same time 5 37 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 9 Internal Event The result of the internal event process can be output to the control output or event output through the DO digital output process gt Input Output Configuration on page 2 1 Operation type Setting Event Configuration Operation type E1 C1 to E5 C1 Direct reverse Standby Setting Event Configuration Direct reverse Standby E1 C2 to E5 C2 Main setting sub setting hysteresis special OFF setup Setting Event E1 to E5 E1 SB to E5 SB E1 HY to E5 HY E1 Event Configuration E1 C3 to E5 C3
194. is unit e Ground the shield line to one point on one side of the cable e Do not connect any terminating resistor to both ends of the communication path Doing so might cause the communication to fail e Even though any units requiring the terminating resistor exist in the communication path do not connect any terminating resistor e Be sure to connect SG terminals each other Failure to do so might cause unstable communications E Connection with solid state relay SSR Chapter 4 WIRING To drive the SSR a model having voltage pulse outputs VO VC or VV must be used Generally the SSR is classified into two groups constant current type and resistor type Constant current type The two conditions listed below must be satisfied e Input current maximum Chec at the input current is within the maximum Input t Check that the input t thin th allowable current or less then the parallel connection can be made e Operating voltage range input 1 Yamatake s PGM10N PGM1OF series Check that the voltage between the terminals of the voltage pulse output is within the specified range This example shows the calculation for the connection of the SDC15 and the PGMIONO15 Note For connection with other model number check the specifications of each model e Input current e Operating voltage range input Since the input current is 10mA or less up to two units 10mA X 2 20mA lt
195. isplay mode can be set MV display setup Whether or not the MV value related items are Standard Setup setting Setup bank displayed in the operation display mode is High function determined by the sum of the following weights Bit 0 MV display Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Bit 1 Heat MV cool MV display Disabled 0 Enabled 2 Bit 3 AT progress display Disabled 0 Enabled 8 Other invalid settings 0 4 MV display Heat MV Cool MV display Undefined AT progress display e When using the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 not only the numeric value but also the bit input can be used to set MV display setup C75 CJ Handling Precautions e Even though the heat MV cool MV display is set at Enabled the heat MV cool MV is not displayed when Heat Cool control C26 is set at 0 Disabled e Even though the AT progress display is set at Enabled the AT progress is not displayed while the AT is stopping 5 76 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E EV display setup Whether or not the main setting and sub setting of Internal Events to 3 are displayed in the operation display mode can be set EV display setup 1h 0 Internal Event set value is not displayed in Standard Setup setting Setup bank the operation display mode High function 1 Set value of Internal Event 1 is displayed in the operation display mode 2 Set values of Internal Events 1 to 2 are displayed in the operation display mode 3 Set
196. l Event 5 OFF delay 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 0s or Os Parameter setting Event 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other than bank O 1s e When the internal event configuration 1 operation type is set at 0 No event the internal event ON delay and OFF delay are not displayed 5 50 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 10 DO Digital Output The following shows the functional block diagram of the DO digital output MV1 process ON OFF control output time proportional output and time proportional output heat of Heat Cool control MV2 process Time proportional output cool of Heat Cool control Setting Parameters CY CY2 Tp Ty MV1 and MV2 control output status Default output is used Control output is used Output assign is used Default output Control output __ Output assign Setting DO Assignment OT1 1 Setting DO Assignment OT1 1 Setting DO Assignment OT1 1 OT2 1 EV1 1 to EV3 1 must be OT2 1 EV1 1 to EV3 1 must be 072 1 EV1 1 to EV3 1 must be set at Default output set at MV1 or MV2 set at Output assign result MV1 and MV2 MV1 and MV2 control output status control output status Internal Event status MV1 and MV2 control output status Internal Event status Output process from each DO Output process from each DO Output assign and polarity terminal terminal Setting DO Assignment Output Control output MV1 Setting
197. l method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 the display and setting can be made e Function of Just FiTTER overshoot limit restraint control coefficient JF ov When the Just FiTTER overshoot limit restraint control coefficient JF ov is 0 the Just FiTTER function becomes invalid When this coefficient is 1 or more the effect of the overshoot limit restraint control becomes larger as the coefficient becomes larger e Function of Just FiTTER settling band JF bd When the value of the width of the absolute value deviation to the PV range is larger than the set value the Just FiTTER function is started When this value is smaller than the set value this is judged as that the PV is settled by the Just FiTTER function E RationaLOOP This RationaLOOP function suppresses the unstable trend if the immediate response to external disturbance is increased by the high precision control logic The following items can be set Control algorithm A 0 PID Conventional PID Standard Parameter setup Extended LE TIT 4 RationaLOOP High performance PID High function tuning bank e When the control method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 the display and setting can be made E SP lag This SP lag function suppresses changes in MV when the SP is changed The following items can be set SP lag time 0 0 to 999 9 High function Parameter setup Extended No effect when set at 0 0 tuning bank e Whe
198. l mode Chapter 11 CALIBRATION E Cautions before starting the calibration When calibrating the unit strictly observe the following cautions Failure to do so may cause faulty accuracy e Before starting the calibration supply the power to this unit for at least 1 hr e The ambient temperature of the calibration place must conform the standard conditions specified in the unit specifications e Do not calibrate the unit in a place where it is in contact with the wind or the ambient temperature fluctuates e Do not calibrate the unit with the measuring instruments having lower specifications stated in the next section li Measuring instruments required for calibration E Measuring instruments required for calibration Measuring instrument Specifications Reference current Accuracy 0 1 or less Minimum resolution 100 V voltage generator or less voltage Minimum resolution 100 pA or less current Resistor Accuracy 0 1 or less Minimum resolution 0 1 or less Ammeter Accuracy 0 1 or less Minimum resolution 1pA or less Accuracy 0 1 C or less Minimum resolution 0 1 C or less E Calibration procedures 1 0 check 1 Select the I O Check tab 2 Select a desired item from the check contents 3 Click Execute The input system key and digital input is shown on the personal computer screen while the input status ON OFF of this unit is being read continuously For the output system control outp
199. led disabled 0 5 31 5 8 DI Digital Input and Internal Contact see e cece cece ee eees 5 32 Me Operation type sessssssesssssossesesosssesosssesosossesoseseos 5 33 E Event channel dof secscsiscscdsatcdiadavesssasiasiscdscetsevianascaas 5 34 E input bit iuncto 16205220 cone eneeeenaccieswnbee se esienwes sirno 5 34 E Input assign sssseeseessesrerecersersorseseecrecereeecoreceseeee 5 35 E Polarity of input assign lt s ssessrcrrsessesrsossesisossesssesserars 5 36 E Polarity of input bit function 6 ee cece eee ence e eee eee e eens 5 36 E DI Assignment setting with Smart Loader Package SLP C35 5 37 5 9 Internal Eventisasdvceascca ste vecscdansseceayeeccoanpdenredneateensvencened 5 38 E Operation sessssecssseessssesosoesessossesosesecosessecoseeeee 5 39 E Operation type Sicatieeeeawh ee oee eee ReeeeGeeaeasines ee 5 45 E Direct reverse standby and EVENT state at READY 5 46 Alarm OR special OFF setup and delay time unit 5 47 E Main setting sub setting and hysteresis eeeeeeee 5 48 E ON delay and OFF delay er ee ere ete ee T 5 49 5 10 DO Digital Output lt sc lt s0s 05 lt cnc ane cesa re ccesnawcese rapenmesmeannne 5 51 E MV1 MV2 process TEENEI Ghee TEAT EEN PETEERE 5 52 E Operation type ee E ee ee ee T Pe 5 53 E Output ASSIGN sessssssesssssossesesosssesos
200. message The read start data address four hexadecimal digits and the read data count four hexadecimal digits are sent 1 2 3 1 Fixed length continuous data read command 2 Start data word address 3 Data count Response message If the message is sent successfully the termination code is taken to be normal two decimal digits and returned appended with the read data count four hexadecimal digits X read data count specified by the command If message transmission ends in error the termination code is taken to be in error two decimal digits and returned without the read data appended e Normal termination reading of single data item foro i i ii a B e Normal termination reading of multiple data items HH i i Y a 1 2 3 4 e Abnormal termination The abnormal termination code is entered at XX 1 gt List of Termination Codes on page 7 14 1 Termination code 2 Data 3 Data 2 to n 1 4 Data n Maximum read data count per message Up to 28 words for both RAM and EEPROM areas 7 8 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Fixed length continuous data write command WD command Send message Response message This command writes continuous data in two byte units This command is suitable for handling data in ladder programs sent by PLC communications as the data is of a fixed length The start data address is expressed as four hexadecimal digits Data is expresse
201. meter bank High function OUT OUT IN OUT 1 T Ts 1 IN Input to PV filter OUT Control output of current filter OUT Control output of previous filter T Filter set value s Ts Sampling cycle time 0 5s E PV hold It is possible to set the PV to a fixed value using the PV hold PV Max hold and PV Min hold of the DI digital input functions PV hold PV is set to a fixed value and it is not updated PV Max hold PV maximum value is held The PV value is updated only when the new PV value is larger than the currently held value PV Min hold PV minimum value is held The PV value is updated only when the new PV value is smaller than the currently held value When using the PV hold PV Max hold or PV Min hold the PV indication on the upper display is flashing E PV low limit high limit and PV low limit high limit alarms PV low limit and PV high limit are provided for each PV input range type In principle 10 FS of each range becomes the PV low limit while 110 FS becomes the PV high limit gt page 10 2 The PV is limited so that it is within a range between the PV low limit and PV high limit If the PV before activation of the PV ratio PV bias and PV filter is larger than the PV high limit PV high limit alarm ALO1 occurs On the contrary if this PV is smaller than the PV low limit the PV low limit alarm ALO2 occurs 5 6 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 2 Mode It is possi
202. mit at AT 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 o Operation display 1 Internal event 1 is displayed 6 AE oH MV high limit at AT 10 0 to 110 0 100 0 e aA 7 ii 7 2 na e Bietental for ONOFF conte 110 8 390 z cw CT display setup 0 Not displayed 1 CT1 current value is displayed 1 ter JER COO Acton POInt GSE 0 Operation display 2 CT1 to 2 current values are displayed gt PV filter 0 0 to 120 0s 0 0 na User level 0 Simple configuration 1 Standard configuration 0 zA PV ratio 0 001 to 9 999 1 000 2 High function configuration B PV bias 1999 to 9999U 0 cae Communication monitor 0 Not used 0 S ose Time proportional cycle unit 1 0 to 3 1 0 display 1 Flashing while data is sending through By Time proportional cycle 1 5 to 120s or 1 to 120s 2 10 or 2 RS 485 communication a PEZA Time proportional cycle unit 2 0 to 3 1 0 2 Flashing while data is receiving through oe Time proportional cycle 2 5 to 120s or 1 to 120s 2 10 or 2 RS 485 communication Sia Time proportional cycle mode 0 Controllability aiming type Oort 3 Logical OR of all DI statuses 1 Operation end service life aiming type Only ON 4 Flashing in READY mode OFF operation within Time proportional cycle cag Number of CT1 turns 0 800 turns 1 to 40 CT turns divided by 100 8 o SPU SP up ramp 0 0 to 999 9U No ramp when set at 0 0U 0 0 EH Number of CTT power wire loops 0 1 time 1 to 6 Number of times T O Sra SP down ramp 0 0 cae Num
203. mode indicator is lit sequentially lt va from the left Operation display pa a LIL MV display ome l Press the para key Other display and setup Operate the para key repeatedly Press the para key o No key operation for 3 min or more Keep the para key pressed for Press the mode 2 sec or longer y Parameter setup display gt TILIL CT LIE 0 AUTO MANUAL selection Press the para key tte i RUN READY selection Press the para key Other display and setup Operate the para key repeatedly Press the para key Keep the para key pressed 2 sec or longer display is changed to the operation display No key operation for 3 min or more Press the mode key or Keep the para key pressed for 2 sec or longer Setup setting display Ona A A E A A i PV range type setup the para key 0a RI E A a pai mode 1 Temperature unit setup Press the para key Other display and setup Operate the para key repeatedly Press the para key The display and setup status shown above are examples for explanation Therefore some displays or settings are not shown actually according to the model and or setup contents Handling Precautions e For details about display and setup contents of the operati
204. ms 7 15 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 8 Cau tions when Making Communications Programs for the Master Station Pay attention to the following points when making communications programs e The longest response time on the device is two seconds For this reason set the response monitor time to two seconds e Resend the same message if there is no response within two seconds Set a communications error to occur if there is no response even after two retries e Be sure to make the above resends to guard against the case when the message cannot be send correctly due to the influence of noise for example during communications Note When the master station resends the message alternatively use the device ID codes X and x This is convenient as you can tell whether or not the received message is the previously received message E Example of communications program 7 16 A sample program is installed in the folder in which the smart loader package SLP C35 has been installed In the default setting the directory is c program files slp slpc35 cpl cpp This program is written in C Microsoft s Visual C 2008 can be used to compile it The program is supplied for purposes of reference to assist the user in making a program and its operation is not 100 guaranteed You can download Visual C 2008 Express Edition from the Microsoft website at http www microsoft com express Bo Handli
205. n Internal Event 4 Operation type Internal Event 4 Direct Reverse Internal Event 4 Standby Internal Event 4 state at READY Reserved for future extension Internal Event 4 Controller alarm OR 5833 16C9 22217 Internal Event 4 Special OFF setup 5834 16CA 22218 Internal Event 4 Delay unit Reserved for future extension Internal Event 5 Operation type Internal Event 5 Direct Reverse Internal Event 5 Standby Internal Event 5 state at READY Reserved for future extension Internal Event 5 Controller alarm OR 5842 1602 22226 sep2 Internal Event 5 Special OFF setup 5843 1603 22227 seps Internal Event 5 Delay unit Reserved for future extension Control method MV low limit at AT MV high limit at AT Differential for ON OFF control ON OFF control action point offset PV filter PV ratio PV bias Reserved for future extension Parameter Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Time proportional cycle unit 1 Time proportional cycle 1 Time proportional cycle unit 2 Time proportional cycle 2 Time proportional cycle mode Reserved for future extension SP up ramp SP down ramp Reserved for future extension 9 6 soir oe een see a Ps ren ome wea fs pe ep J COREE PP Fs 660 ee woof P 5822 56B 5823 56B C C1 56C2 56C 56C 56C 5 5 56 56 5826 5827 5828 5829 56C 6C 56C 6C 56CA soe isce
206. n communications with a PC PLC or other host devices are available using a user prepared program The communications protocol can be selected from the CPL communications Controller Peripheral Link Yamatake s host communications protocol and the MODBUS communications This chapter describes the MODBUS communications E Features The features of the SDC15 s communications functions are as follows e Up to 31 SDC15 units can be connected to a single master station as a host device e When the communications specifications of the host device conform to the RS 232C interface the communications converter CMC1OL sold separately is required The CMC10L allows you to perform the conversion between RS 232C and RS 485 e Almost all of the parameters held by the device can be communicated gt Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA E Setup The following setups are required for performing the MODBUS communications e If the optional model number is provided with the RS 485 communications Item Display Contents Initial User Setting display bank value level CPL MODBUS r 54 0 CPL Simple Setup setting Setup bank 1 MODBUS ASCII format Standard 2 MODBUS RTU format High Station address amp 5 0 Does not communicate TuncHon Same as above 1 to 127 Transmission speed C 56 9 4800bps Same as above 1 9600bps 2 19200bps 3 38400bps Data format Data length 7 0 7 bit Same as ae 1 8 bit Data format Pari
207. n the control method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 the display and setting can be made e Function of SP lag time SP Lg When the SP lag time is set at 0 0 the SP lag function becomes invalid When this value is 0 1 or more changes in MV when the SP is changed become smaller and the effect of the overshoot suppression becomes larger as the value becomes larger 5 20 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 4 AT auto tuning Function The AT auto tuning function is used in the following cases e The PID constants are set automatically with the control method set at Fixed PID CtrL 1 e The PV rise is slow or overshoot is large in the control with the PID constants which have been set automatically using the ST function e The PV rise becomes slow or overshoot becomes large with the control method set at ST CtrL 2 The AT function can be used when the control method is set at either Fixed PID CtrL 1 or ST CtrL 2 E Starting procedures 1 Make sure that the PV input or operation end heater power etc is controllable 2 Make sure that the mode indicator rdy is off and the operation is in the RUN mode If the indicator rdy is lit and the operation is in the READY mode change the mode to the RUN mode 3 Make sure that the mode indicator man is off and the operation is in the AUTO mode If the indicator man is lit and the operation is in the MANUA
208. nal Contact 1 Input assign A Internal Contact 1 Input assign B Internal Contact 1 Input assign C Internal Contact 1 Input assign D sess sees ae see os xa xps sas ver aoe oer os xfs xp s sas as rio sae x AKIEICAES x san veen rm saan x AEJEAES x AKAEOEAES x MEOEJEAES sae eee ree sae sas er rm sar so ao aee seo _ sas wor aieo sor _ san wae meso se _ saor wen mest seo _ seoa woe meee soe _ saso wos mess sas _ DOECO sar war mess sr _ sore woe aes see _ sara wee meer see _ sera aon meee son _ sars 1s mess 56 _ sae sc meso see _ ES RE si es EA aa aa Z 1 1 COACE a soe Prsie Pare Pane e sas Piste Parco feo _ p soe Pose oreo foe TT na 2 g o Zl2Z2 2 e e o o If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank 472 is prior to 2 04 the item name is reserved for future extension the symbol in the read column is A and the symbol in the write column is x for both RAM and EEPROM 9 3 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Assignment Internal Contact 1 Polarity B 5408 1520 21792 5520 imal Contact Poliy aio e am ssa Internal Contact 1 Polarity 5411 1523 21795 5523 Internal Contact 1 Event channel def 5412 ff Internal Conta
209. nance Cleaning When removing the dirt from the measuring instrument wipe it off with a soft cloth rag At this time do not use any organic solvent such as paint thinner or benzine Part replacement Do not replace any parts of this unit Fuse replacement When replacing the fuse connected to the electric wiring always use the specified standard fuse Standard TEC127 Shut down speed Slow action type T Rated voltage 250V Rated current 200mA E Alarm displays and corrective action The following Table shows the alarm displays and corrective actions if any failure occurs in this unit ALG PV input failure Sensor burnout incorrect wiring Check the wiring Over range incorrect PV input type setting Set the PV input type AL Ge PV input failure Sensor burnout incorrect wiring again Under range incorrect PV input type setting ALOJ C failure Terminal temperature is faulty Check the ambient thermocouple temperature PV input failure Sensor burnout incorrect wiring Check the wiring RTD CT input failure A current exceeding the upper e Use a CT with the correct over range limit of the display range was number of turns for the CT input 1 or 2 measured The number of CT display range or both turns or the number of CT e Reset the number of CT power wire loops is incorrectly turns set or wiring is incorrect e Reset the number of CT power wire loops e Check the wiring Replace the unit Parameter fail
210. ncreases or turns ON the manipulated variable MV as the PV increases E Special control outputs The control output at PV alarm and control output at READY can be set Output operation at PV IT m 0 Control calculation is continued High function alarm 1d 4 Output at PV alarm is output Setup setting Setup bank Output at PV alarm i 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 High function Setup setting Setup bank Li Output at READY Heat i 7 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 Standard Setup setting Setup bank L High function Output at READY Cool E if 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 Standard Setup setting Setup bank High function e When the control method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 and the Heat Cool control is set enabled C26 1 Output at READY cool C18 can be displayed and set e The PV alarm status means that ALO1 02 or 03 occurs 5 12 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E MANUAL mode change The control output when the AUTO mode is changed to the MANUAL mode can be set Output operation at 10 0 Bumpless transfer Standard changing Auto Manual l 1 Preset High function Setup setting Setup bank Preset MANUAL value n 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 or 50 0 Standard Setup setting Setup bank eu High function e When Output operation at changing Auto Manual C19 is set at 0 Bumpless transfer the manipulated variable MV when the AUTO mode is changed to the MANUAL mode is retained When set at 1 Prese
211. nd this unit also enters the calibration mode When this unit is in the calibration mode tESt will appear on the lower display However note that another message appears when inspecting the LED C Handling Precautions e Yamatake shall not be held responsible for any defects arising from improper calibration made by the customer e To return the unit to the calibration status of the default settings before shipment during calibration follow the steps below From the pull down menu select Command Data retrieval The data which has been calibrated is disposed of and the data is then returned to the default settings before shipment If this operation is performed accidentally during calibration all contents which have been calibrated by the customer will be lost E Exiting the calibration To exit the calibration perform either of the following operations 1 On the Calibration screen of the Smart Loader Package select Quit Q from the File F pull down menu 2 Click X at the upper right corner of the Calibration screen to close the screen The screen will be returned to the menu screen and the unit also returns to the normal mode C Handling Precautions If the loader cable is disconnected before starting the calibration exit operation with the Smart Loader Package this unit is continuously kept in the calibration mode At this time turn OFF the power and turn it ON again The unit will return to the norma
212. ng Precautions Yamatake assumes no responsibility with regard to any trouble caused by using this program Prior to running the sample program Compiling Make sure to check the settings for communications type station address transmission speed and data format of the instrument At the Visual Studio 2008 command prompt enter cl to begin compiling Example of compilation result C sample gt cl cpl cpp Microsoft R 32 bit C C Optimizing Compiler Version 15 00 30729 01 for 80x86 Copyright C Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved cpl cpp Microsoft R Incremental Linker Version 9 00 30729 01 Copyright C Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved out cpl cpl obj eXe Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS Running the sample program This program is used for reading and writing data When the program is executed the application layers of the instruction message and response message communicated are indicated command RS 14356W 2 result 00 0 0 command WS 14357W 2 result 00 Sample indication of execution results Processing of the sample program e Communication settings Call open and initialize the RS 232C serial port e Command execution Set a desired character string in command and call AppCPL Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 8 1 Outline of Communications If the optional model number is provided with the RS 485 communications functio
213. nning 42 During SP ramp 43 Undefined 0 If necessary press 2 Press and hold Eu bY to ud Event output 1 to 3 44 Alarm occurs 45 PV alarm occurs 46 Undefined 47 Mode key pressing status mode once to para for more ok 4 5 to ote 5 Output assign D Control output 1 to 2 48 Event output 1 status 0 change to the than 2s again to Eu tS to buns Event output 1 to 3 49 Control output 1 status i H R ror ok 4 6 to ot2 6 Control output 1 to 2 Event output The digits are determined to 1st 2nd 3rd operation display display i ton the Eu 468 to Eu3 6 ito 3 Polarity A to D and 4 th digit from the right end Next press and upper display 1st digit Polarity A 0 Direct 1 Reverse 0 hold ara for 2nd digit Polarity B 0 wi 2st 3rd digit Polarity C 0 more tnan cs to 4the digit Polarity D 0 ok fi toat2 t Polarity Control output 1 to 2 0 Direct 1 Reverse 0 get the parameter ss Eu Lito Eu3 I Event output 1 to 3 setup display F 7 ot 1 4 to ok2 8 Latch Control output 1 to 2 0 None 1 Latch Latch at ON 0 s Eu 48 to Eu 3 8 Event output 1 to 3 2 Latch Latch at OFF except for initialization Orr F appears at power ON on the upper display Press para 4 When lt v or repeatedly to A is pressed the vOr P lower displa AD User function bank change the seer prey Baa z ERA A display to V4 flashes and can be isplay tem ontents initial value Setting value UF ito UF 8 User function 1 to 8
214. nt 3 main setting Internal Event 3 sub setting Internal Event 3 remaining time the internal event 1999 to 9999U Set value is other than the following values 0 to 9999U Set value is an absolute value 199 9 to 999 9 Set value is MV Setting is disabled T is displayed at the right end digit when using the ON delay time L is displayed at the right end digit when using the OFF delay time event is displayed Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the EV display setup C76 Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the timer remain time display setup C77 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA 6 2 List of Parameter Setting Displays The following shows the meanings of the values stated in the User Level column 0 Simple Standard or High function configuration 1 Standard or High function configuration and 2 High function configuration E Mode bank Bank selection Ag E Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level AUTO MANUAL AUto AUTO mode Displayed when the control MAn MANUAL mode method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the display mode setup C73 RUN READY rUn RUN mode Whether or not this item is rdy READY mode displayed is selected by the display mode setup C73 AT stop start At oF AT stop Displayed when the control At on AT start method is ot
215. nternal Event 2 12 Internal Event 3 13 Internal Event 4 14 Internal Event 5 15 to 17 Undefined 18 Communication D11 19 Communication D12 Communication DI3 Communication D14 MANUAL mode READY mode Undefined AT running During SP ramp Undefined Alarm occurs PV alarm occurs Undefined mode key pressing status Event output 1 status Control output 1 status When using internal contact 1 the default input is DI digital input 1 Displayed when internal contact 1 Input bit function is function 1 to 4 dl1 2 0 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level di Q Internal Contact 1 The digits are determined to 1st digit 0000 Displayed when internal Polarity A to D 2nd digit 3rd digit and 4th digit from contact 1 Input bit function is the right end function 1 to 4 dl1 2 0 1st digit Polarity A 0 Direct Polarity of Input 1 Reverse assign A 2nd digit Polarity B Polarity of Input assign B 3rd digit Polarity C Polarity of Input assign C 4th digit Polarity D Polarity of Input assign D 9 Internal Contact 1 0 Direct Polarity 1 Reverse Internal Contact 1 0 Every Internal Event Displayed when the Event channel def 1 to 5 Internal Event No operation type of internal contact 1 is timer stop start dl1 1 17 Internal Contact 2 Same as Internal Contact 1 Operation type Operation type 0 to 20 Int
216. nternal Event 5 Configuration 1 Operation type Setup setting Event Configuration bank NoahRwWhY oO PV high limit PV low limit PV high low limit Deviation high limit Deviation low limit Deviation high low limit Deviation high limit No event Simple Standard High function Final SP reference Deviation low limit Final SP reference Deviation high low limit Final SP reference SP high limit SP low limit SP high low limit MV high limit MV low limit MV high low limit CT1 heater burnout over current CT1 heater short circuit CT2 heater burnout over current CT2 heater short circuit Loop diagnosis 1 Loop diagnosis 2 Loop diagnosis 3 Alarm status READY status MANUAL status Invalid During AT execution status During SP ramp status Control direct action status During ST execution status Invalid Timer status High and low limits of MFB value Invalid in this unit 5 45 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Direct reverse standby and EVENT state at READY Direct reverse standby and EVENT state at READY accompanying with the operation type can be set Internal Event 1 The digits are called 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd Simple Configuration 2 Operation type digit and 4th digit from the right end Standard Setup setting Event 1st digit Direct reverse setup High function Configura
217. nternal event 1 a Internal event 1 p Timer remaining N 4gg ck i L L g main setting E 5h sub setting time para key cr DI _ a e O e mn e Dis LI cut LILI LILI oat LI cut LI ont LILI Internal event 1 AT progress Current Current Setting value Setting value delay time value value value Internal event 3 Internal event 3 Timer remaining Internal event2 p Internal event 2 sub setting main setting g time 2 is EeSh sub setting main setting q A Pern A wal 1 Internal event 2 Timer remaining pi 3 p Internal event 3 re ae f ian hay re Ty o gt TJ TJ Ty C3
218. ntrol method is other than the Reo oH MV high limit at AT 10 0 to 110 0 100 0 o o ON OFF control CtrL 0 IF a Differential 0 to 9999U a when the control for ON OFF control method is other than the 2FF5 ON OFF control 1999 to 9999U ONOFF control CtiEa0 action point offset PV filter 0 to 120 0s Time proportional cycle unit 1 ry ni ue m pang Time proportional cycle 1 Time proportional cycle unit 2 ry Le c My Time proportional cycle 2 Time proportional cycle mode 0 Unit of 1s 1 Fixed at 0 5s Cycle time setting is disabled 2 Fixed at 0 2s Cycle time setting is disabled 3 Fixed at O 1s Cycle time setting is disabled 5 to 120s Output includes the relay output 1 to 120s Output does not include the relay output 0 Unit of 1s 1 Fixed at 0 5s Cycle time setting is disabled 2 Fixed at 0 2s Cycle time setting is disabled 3 Fixed at O 1s Cycle time setting is disabled 5 to 120s Output includes the relay output 1 to 120s Output does not include the relay output 0 Controllability aiming type 1 Operation end service life aiming type Only one ON OFF operation within Time proportional cycle 0 0 to 999 9U No ramp when set at 0 0U olo Displayed under the same conditions as 4 except that a relay is not included in the output Displayed when MV1 time proportional
219. number of CT power wire loops Each CT of CT inputs 1 and 2 can be set Number of CT1 turns 0 800 turns High function Setup bank 1 to 40 CT turns divided by 100 Number of CT1 power wire 0 1 times loops Setup bank 1 to 6 Number of times Number of CT2 turns A 0 800 turns Setup bank E L 1 to 40 CT turns divided by 100 Number of CT2 power wire 1 time loops Setup bank I 1 to 6 Number of times e If the controller has two CT inputs this item is displayed and can be set e For the number of turns use the number of CT turns divided by 100 For example if the number of CT turns is 400 set at 4 However a setting of 0 has the same meaning as 8 namely 800 CT turns If using the optional QN206A or QN212A which have 800 turns set at 8 e For the number of power wire loops use the number of times the power wire passes through the CT hole For example if the power wire passes through the CT hole 2 times set at 2 However a setting of 0 has the same meaning as 1 namely that there is 1 power wire loop gt Relay and power supply etc Power wire Heater etc lt This device 5 71 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 72 g Handling Precautions e Do not allow the current to exceed the upper limit of the CT input display range Doing so might cause a malfunction e If a current exceeding the upper limit of the CT input display range is detected the CT input failu
220. o 51 to 64 max 85Q the other ranges 0 5 to 12V Min IMQ O to lV range e eee e eee eee 1A sucked to the A terminal 0 to 5V 1 to 5V range 3 54A sucked to the A terminal Oto 10V range e eee e reese 7A sucked to the A terminal Downscale ALO2 However the burnout cannot be detected in a range of 0 to 10V 0 5 to 12V Max 10002 Downscale ALO2 However the burnout cannot be detected in a range of 0 to 20mA Max 30mA Max 4V a higher voltage might cause device failure When the power to this controller is turned off the current input circuit is cut off If you connect two or more current i nput type controllers in series change the current input to voltage input by connecting a resistor No 81401325 sold separately See Chapter 4 13 1 Chapter 13 SPECIFICATIONS Control output e Relay output Contact rating Life Min open close specifications Min open time close times Open voltage Internal resistance Allowable current OFF leak current Min OFF time ON time Current output Output type Allowance load resistance Output accuracy Digital input Number of input points Input type Allowable ON contact resistance Allowable OFF contact resistance Allowable ON state residual voltage Open terminal voltage ON terminal current Minimum hold time Control output 1 NO side 250Vac 30Vdc 3A resistance load Cont
221. o not make incorrect connections If the cables are connected incorrectly this might cause the unit to malfunction Sv 0900 Doa Bo The controller does not function for approximately 6 sec after the power has been turned ON Great care should be taken if the relayoutput from the controller is used as an interlock signal iii A CAUTION There is no isolation between control outputs 1 and 2 When necessary use an appopriate isolator Do not connect multiple loader cables to multiple units from one personal computer The current coming from other circuits might cause an error in the indication of the PV When wiring RS 485 communications do not connect a terminating resistor to either end of the communication path A terminating resistor might cause a communication failure Be sure to provide a switch for cutoff of the main power to this unit within easy reach of the operator Additionally connect a slow action type T fuse having a rated current of 0 2A and rated voltage of 250V to the wiring for the instrument power supply of the AC power supply model IEC127 Do not operate the keys with a mechanical pencil or other sharp tipped object Doing so might cause faulty operation o 00086 In addition to ON OFF control and conventional PID control this unit is equipped with self tuning control which does not require manual setting of control constants Self tuning control ensures stable control
222. o that no crimp terminals are in contact with adjacent terminals 4 4 Chapter 4 WIRING E Connection of open collector output to digital input This unit A K Ne E q S 8 E Connection of communication RS 485 cable 3 wire system This unit slave station 5 SG hese This unit slave station pct oti DA FG al DA 2 D gt w Master station n gt D ion l o y Q 1 27 vu o D 0s C oy CJ Handling Precautions e Do not connect DA and DB Doing so might cause damage to this unit e Ground the shield line to one point on one side of the cable e Do not connect any terminating resistor to both ends of the communication path Doing so might cause the communication to fail e Even though any units requiring the terminating resistor exist in the communication path do not connect any terminating resistor e Be sure to connect SG terminals each other Failure to do so might cause unstable communications 4 5 Chapter 4 WIRING 5 wire system 4 6 Master station This unit slave station Shield ___ _ eg Te hield el ee eg O DA This unit slave station ples CJ Handling Precautions Do not connect DA and DB Doing so might cause damage to th
223. oes 8 6 8 3 Description of Commands CRE Whe MEAGRE NSEOEdE RGRSRAR SSSR 8 7 M Read command 03H seeceeceeceeceeeeeeees ee T 8 7 E Write command 10H eee ee eee cece e eee e tence eee eeceeeeeee 8 9 8 4 Specifications Common with CPL Communications Function 8 11 MH Definition of word addresses c cece cece cece cence cececesees 8 11 M Numeric representation cece cece cece ce cee ee cnceeeeences 8 11 m RS 485 driver control timing specifications s 0e 8 11 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA E List of communication data cccccccccecccscccccceeeeeeees 9 1 Chapter 10 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING E MAINTENANCE si csediis vise icicciscinccei che a 10 1 E Alarm displays and corrective action eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 1 E Operation in case of PV input failure eee eee eee cece 10 2 xi Chapter 11 CALIBRATION E Staring the Calibration 12 icc2 lt 0s2 00cvsaencees esas cantnesnesnces cusses 11 1 M Exiting the calibration cece cece cece cece eee reece see eeces 11 1 Mm Cautions before starting the calibration eseeeeeeee eens 11 2 E Measuring instruments required for calibration 5 11 2 E Calibration procedures e sesessesossessossssecsesesecsesees 11 2 Chapter 12 DISPOSAL Chapter 13 SPECIFICATIONS Me Specifications ssssssessesess
224. of event operation type In this example the event 1 operation type is set to deviation high limit Start from the operation display if necessary press mode once to get the operation display Press and hold para for more than 2s to get the parameter setup display 5 is shown on the upper display Press para Fit ionth to get Press and hold para for more than 2s again to get the setup setting display The current set value for 0 PV input range type is displayed eee on the lower display amp on the lower display indicates that the event operation type is set to none When the v or A key is pressed the rightmost digit on the lower display flashes Change the flashing digit to 4 by pressing v or A If no key is pressed for more than 2s the displayed value is set and the display changes from flashing to continuously lit 4 on the lower display indicates that the event operation type is set for deviation high limit I pilaf Similarly use lt to set the event 2 operation type and use 3 0 for event 3 AT forces ON OFF of the MV a number of times a limit cycle to calculate PID values Check that this operation does not create any problems for the associated equipment before executing AT Press and hold para for more than 2s to get the parameter setup display 5 is Diva shown on the upper display Start from the op
225. of numeric representation is the same as the following gt RD WD RU and WU commands in Numeric Representation in the Application Layer on page 7 13 E RS 485 driver control timing specifications CF Reception and Transmission Timing on page 7 15 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA E List of communication data The following shows the meanings of the symbols stated in the RAM EEPROM Read Write columns No symbol Possible X Possible according to the conditions A Possible but data is invalid x Impossible Note When reading the EEPROM address data in the RAM is read in the same manner as reading of the RAM address Decimal point information No decimal point 1 to 3 Decimal point position The communication data becomes that the original value is multiplied by 10 100 or 1000 P Follows the PV input range S Follows various conditions RS WS commands of CPL communication Decimal data address with W attached next to it is used RD WD RU WU commands of CPL communication Hexadecimal data address is used Commands of MODBUS communication Hexadecimal data address is used Bank Item name RAM address IC EEPROM Decimal point Remarks ranma Pas pom feet an x x a information ROM Version 1 ce 4112 BSE a E ROM Version 2 411 LOADER Information 4114 0116 16662 411 0117 16663 4117 5001 5389 Communication lock 5002 138A 21386 538 Loader lock 5003 138B 21387 538B Password
226. ogical AND of DH and PV status EVs The ON delay time setting of the timer becomes the time at which the operation is stopped automatically after the temperature has reached the set value The mode RUN READY is changed based on a combination of DI and timer ON OFF Status Control OFF Timer counting after Operation stop by status starting of operation time up Status of Internal ON OFF Contact 2 READY e Event Display Internal Event 1 Internal Event 2 EVENT state at READY Ex C2 0 EVENT state at READY is continued 0 None 2 1min Alarm OR Special OFF setup Delay time unit Event main setting low limit Event sub setting high limit Exon foo Ex OF 0 Hysteresis ON delay OFF delay Deviation high limit No standby EVENT state at READY is continued As usual Note The internal event No is indicated at the mark of x shown in the Display column 5 61 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION e DI Assignment DI Assignment Display Internal Contact 1 Internal Contact 2 Operation type 17 Timer stop start 7 RUN READY Input bit function DIx 2 1 Function 1 A and B or 1 Function 1 A and B or C and D C and D Input assign A 2 DI Input assign B DIx 4 11 Internal Event 2 10 Internal Event 1 Setting 4 Deviation Setting 32 Timer high limit Status Input assign C DIx 5 0 Normally opened 0 Normally opened Normally Off 0 Normally O
227. on Up to 6 units Note Omron G3NA Parallel connection Up to 6 units Note Note 3 units for each output 4 8 Chapter 4 WIRING Resistor type Yamatake s PGM etc When necessary an appropriate external resistor is connected in series so that the voltage between the input terminals of the SSR you are using is within the specified range Example Connection of two Yamatake PGM units Connection diagram External resistor R1 A 3 4 3 RO X LAG R2 Vf R2 Vf yv E a PGM PGM Q ol r Nw V 19V 15 RO 820 0 5 R1 680 Q R2 260 Q Vf 1 1V Voltage between terminals of PGM V 2 X Vf RO R1 R2 R2 X R2 Vf 545V Input voltage range of PGM Since the input voltage range is 3 to 6V the operation is possible External resistors SSR to be Number of units Connection External Remarks used to be connected resistor ooo 1KQ serial connection Rating is 1 2W or more 330Q serial connection Rating is 1 2W or more Number of connectable units SSR to be used VO VC model VV model PGM 680Q serial connection Rating is 1 2W or more i serial connecti Note 4 units for each output 4 9 Chapter 4 WIRING Connection with current input type controllers When the power to this controller is turned off the current input circuit is cut off If multiple current input type SDCs are connected in series and you want to turn them on
228. on display parameter setting display and setup setting display gt List of Operation Displays on page 6 1 List of Parameter Setting Displays on page 6 3 List of Setup Setting Displays on page 6 8 e When pressing the lt key with the para key kept pressed instead of pressing of the para key various displays and settings can be operated in the reverse order However the operation that both the para key and lt key are kept pressed for 2 sec or longer is invalid 2 3 Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS E Special key operation type When the key operation mode type of the setup setting C71 is set at 1 the special key operation type is selected The display and setting data of the special key operation type are arranged as shown in the following tree structure Operation display PV and SP Bank selection Mode LSP group selection SP MV Event Mode bank AUTO MANUAL Heat MV PID RUN READY Cool MV Parameter AT progress Extension tuning AT stop start CT input 1 current value Set up CT input 2 current value Event configuration Internal Event 1 main setting DI assignment Internal Event 1 sub setting DO assignment SP bank LSP1 group SP LSP2 group SP 5 7 5 7 5 28 5 28 Internal Event 1 remain time User function Internal Event 2 main setting Lock LSP3 group SP 5 28 LSP4 group SP 5 28 Internal
229. on page 5 4 e For details about the accuracy of each PV range type CF Chapter 13 SPECIFICATIONS on page 13 1 5 2 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Temperature unit When the PV input type is T thermocouple or R RTD the temperature unit can be selected f Temperature unit 7 3 0 Celsius Simple Setup setting Setup bank L UL 4 S Standard High function e When the PV input type is T thermocouple or R RTD the display and setting can be made E Cold junction compensation T C When the PV input type is T thermocouple any of the following can be selected e The cold junction compensation T C is performed inside this unit e The cold junction compensation T C is not performed inside this unit since an external cold junction compensation unit such as ice bath is used e When the PV input type is T thermocouple the display and setting can be made Cold junction 0 Cold junction compensation T C is High function compensation T C i performed internal Setup setting Setup bank 1 Cold junction compensation T C is not performed external E PV square root extraction dropout When the PV input type is L DC voltage DC current a dropout value can be set so that the result of the PV square root extraction used to convert the pressure differential pressure into the flow becomes 0 e When the PV input type is L DC voltage DC current the display and setting can
230. ontrol action 0 Heat control Reverse action Direct Reverse 1 Cool control Direct action 5 Output operation at 0 Control calculation is continued 2 PV alarm 1 Output at PV alarm is output Output at READY 10 0 to 110 0 1 Heat Output at READY 10 0 to 110 0 1 Displayed when the control Cool method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 and the heat cool control C26 1 is used rar co a ry ry ry on ry Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level C Output operation at 0 Bumpless transfer 1 Displayed when the control changing Auto Manual 1 Preset method is other than the Preset MANUAL 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 or ON OFF control CtrL 0 value 50 0 When the operation mode is Initial output type 0 Auto ae alone ores E Wer mode of PID control 1 Not initialized val e C20 becomes the 2 Initialized If SP value different from the current value is input Manipulated Variable MV Initial output of PID 10 0 to 110 0 0 0 or control 50 0 Heat Cool control 0 Not used Displayed when the control 1 Used method is other than the ON OFF control CtrL 0 When set at 1 the control action is set to the reverse action C14 0 the preset MANUAL value C20 is set to 50 0 and the initial output of the PID control C22 is changed to 50 0 Heat Cool selection 0 Normal Displayed when the 1
231. ool control e When MV1 is connected to any of the relay control output voltage pulse control output and event output in the DO Assignment the display and setting of the Time proportional cycle 1 Cy can be made e When the Heat Cool control is used and MV2 is connected to any of the relay control output voltage pulse control output and event output in the DO Assignment the display and setting of the Time proportional cycle 2 Cy2 can be made e The initial value of the Time proportional cycle 1 Cy is 10 when the control output is the relay output and it is 2 in other cases e The initial value of the Time proportional cycle 2 Cy2 is 10 when a model with one control output point is used and it is 2 when other models are used e The setting of the time proportional cycle mode tp ty is valid to the time proportional outputs of both MV1 and MV2 e When MV1 is connected to the relay control output or event output in the DO Assignment and the Time proportional cycle Cy is set at less than 5s the operation is performed at intervals of 5s e When MV2 is connected to the relay control output or event output in the DO Assignment and the Time proportional cycle 2 Cy2 is set at less than 5s the operation is performed at intervals of 5s 5 52 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Operation type The outputs of the control outputs to 2 and event outputs to 3 can be se
232. op Controller User s Manual for Basic Operation and or operated Yamatake s Single Loop Controller to fully understand its basic operation SDC15 Single Loop Controller User s Manual for Installation Manual No CP UM 5287JE This manual is supplied with the product Personnel in charge of design and or manufacture of a system using this unit must thoroughly read this manual This manual describes the safety precautions installation wiring list of parameters and primary specifications For further information about operation refer to other manuals Basic Operation and or Installation amp Configuration SDC15 Single Loop Controller User s Manual for Basic Operation Manual No CP SP 1147E This manual is optional sold separately The manual describes the functions you can set up only with Simple configuration Personnel in charge of design manufacture operation and or maintenance of a system using this unit must thoroughly read this manual This manual describes the installation wiring major functions and settings operating procedures troubleshooting and detailed specifications SDC15 Single Loop Controller User s Manual for Installation amp Configuration Manual No CP SP 1148E This manual This manual is optional sold separately The manual describes the hardware and all functions of this unit Personnel in charge of design manufacture operation and or maintenance of a system using this unit and th
233. ose in charge of communication software of a system using the communication functions of this unit must thoroughly read this manual This manual also describes the installation wiring connections for communication all functions and settings of this unit operating procedures communication with host station such as personal computer communication addresses troubleshooting and detailed specifications SLP C35 Smart Loader Package for SDC15 25 26 35 36 Single Loop Controller User s Manual Manual No CP UM 5290E This manual is supplied with the Smart Loader Package The manual describes the software used to make various settings for SDC15 25 26 35 36 using a personal computer Personnel in charge of design or setting of a system using SDC15 25 26 35 36 must thoroughly read this manual The manual describes installation of the software into a personal computer operation of the personal computer various functions and setup procedures SDC15 Quick Reference Guide Manual No CP UM 1213E For those using the SDC15 for the first time or for operators on the work site this guide serves as a reference when setting or modifying parameters Key operations menu flowcharts and parameter settings are presented with color illustrations Organization of This User s Manual This manual is organized as follows SDC15 Quick Reference Guide Chapter 1 Chapier 2 Chapter 3 Chapier 4 Chapier 5 Chapter 6
234. output heat of Heat Cool control is connected to the relay control output voltage pulse output or event output in the DO Assignment The initial value of Time proportional cycle 1 is 10 when the control output is the relay output The initial value is 2 in other cases Displayed under the same conditions as Z except that a relay is not included in the output Displayed when the Heat Cool control is used C26 1 and MV2 time proportional output heat of Heat Cool control is connected to the relay control output voltage pulse control output or event output The initial value of Time proportional cycle 2 is 10 when the model has one control output point The initial value is 2 in other cases The initial value is 1 when control output 1 is the relay output The initial value is O in other cases M Time unit of the ramp is selected by the SP ramp unit C32 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA E Extended tuning bank Bank selection Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level AT type 0 Normal Standard control Displayed when the control characteristics method is other than the 1 Immediate response Control ON OFF control CtrL 0 characteristics that respond immediately to external disturbance 2 Stable Control characteristics having less up down fluctuation of PV tFhd Just FiTTER settling 0 00 to 10 00 0 30 ban
235. pe use an appropriate crimp type terminal lug suitable for the M3 5 screw to connect the terminals The tightening torque of the terminal screw must be 0 78 to 0 98 N m or less e Pay special attention so that no crimp terminals are in contact with adjacent terminals e For the C15T panel mount type to connect 2 crimp terminals to the same terminal screw bend the crimp terminals before use I e For the C15T panel mount type connect wires to terminals 1 6 and 13 18 from the left when viewing the terminal block A 5 8mm max B 5 5 to 7 6mm Recommended crimp terminal V1 25 MS3 manufactured za by J S T Mfg Co Ltd gt E e Keep the input output signal cables 50cm or more away from the drive power cable and or power cable Additionally do not pass the input output signal cables and the drive power cable and or power cable together through the same conduit or duct e When connecting this unit and other measuring instrument in parallel carefully check the conditions necessary for other instrument before starting the instrumentation e The digital input is so designed that it is non voltage input A contact for micro current must be used e Pass the conductor to which the heater current flows through the current transformer Additionally carefully check that the heater current does not exceed the allowable current level stated in the specification If the heater current exceeds the allowable current l
236. pecesaneaiaeeeds 11 2 TEC directive saccadace chcaad daseensgasadnnxvavas 1 1 Input assign s ssssesssresosseseresereeesere 5 35 Input bit function seseeserserssresess 3 32 5 34 Input types eee e cece cece cece cence cece ences Installation place 0seseeee eee enone eens Asi Integration time eee cece eee e eee e eens 5 4 Internal contact essssssssssses 5 32 5 33 5 35 Internal Event Operation type ssssressse 5 45 Internal Eveni sersrrisipeprerarpsceecri escores S252 SO MUG had arike derearead seumeenes 13 4 J Tost H TER sever atiepedscd ates rinka Erai 1 1 5 20 K Key lock ee eee eee cece cece cece eee e ee eees 5 83 Key operation type eessssssereeerssssere 5 73 L EE AAE cde nceaeeciaewereeeateweuwseeames S 57 Line Miei caeestieecaseateeasdincat aakeeusdn 4 10 Loader CONHECION 2282s 24esesccoessasceeniiceass 1 5 E E TE EAE ET E A EE 5 83 Local SP wiicdsevesvewtscsetkodeastaded antipi 5 27 Loop diagnosis eeeeeeeeeee 5 41 5 42 5 43 Lower display s eseeeeeeeeeees 145 333 275 L shaped plug adaptor seeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 3 IE EEA TEE E T AFE ETE TNE 5 27 5 28 LSP system group sssssctesneracwene ands 5 77 5 28 Index 2 M Main setting see eee cece cece een eeeeeee 5 48 Maimee hs poeta cota dab EREE 10 1 MANUAL scscccegeesceceepiwieaceonicgeedes 5 44 Master statiOtiisdcetsccicavsataicesdeaaanda daean 7 1 Message Structure ssssrres
237. put ON OFF status and the current value at output OFF is fixed at 0 0A E CT output When the CT type is set at heater burnout detection the output of the output ON OFF monitor object can be set CT1 output r J 0 Control output 1 Simple Setup setting Setup bank L J 1 Control output 2 Standard 2 Event output 1 High function CT2 output L H 3 Event output 2 Setup setting Setup bank 4 Event output 3 e When the optional model has two CT input points and the CT type is set at heater burnout detection the display and setting can be made m CT measurement wait time When the CT type is set at heater burnout detection a period of time between changing of the output ON OFF and starting of the current value measurement can be set CT1 measurement wait time 7 7 5 20 to 300 ms 30ms Simple Setup setting Setup bank L Ju Standard CT2 measurement wait time 7 m 1 30ms High function Setup setting Setup bank e When the optional model has two CT input points and the CT type is set at heater burnout detection the display and setting can be made e When the measurement wait time has elapsed after the ON OFF status of the output to be monitored has been changed the measurement of the current value is started When 100 ms have elapsed after that the measurement of the current value is completed 5 70 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Number of CT turns and
238. ration described here means MV limited by the MV high limit at AT At oH or MV high limit at AT oH The default setting before shipment is 100 If this AT operation does not function correctly take any of the following measures 1 Change the MV low limit at AT At oL or MV high limit at AT At oH to an appropriate value and then start the AT function 2 Use the ST function 3 Set the PID constants manually without use of AT e The AT progress value can be seen in the operation display mode gt List of Operation Displays on page 6 1 When the Heat Cool control is not used the AT progress value decrements from 4 during execution of the AT function and becomes 0 at completion of the AT function When the Heat Cool control is used the AT progress value decrements from 8 during execution of the AT function and becomes 0 at completion of the AT function In both cases the AT progress value may be 1 or 0 when the AT process is in the transient status e Appropriate PID constants cannot be obtained depending on the control subject If this happens set the PID constants manually e The MV ON OFF change point determined when the AT function is started does not change even though the SP is changed while the AT is running gt AT Stop Start on page 5 8 and AT on page 5 18 5 23 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 5 ST Self tuning Function When the following ST st
239. re alarm AL11 is displayed However if the excessive current is very large the CT input failure alarm is not displayed e The CT input display range and measurement current range change according to the number of CT turns and the number of CT power wire loops Set for the number of CT turns and the number of CT power wire loops suitable for the conditions of the CT connected The display range and the measurement current range are calculated by the formulas shown below The internal calculations of this device have an error of less than 0 1A Display range lower limit A 0 0 Display range upper limit A Number of turns 16 x number of power wire loops x 1 4 Measurement current range lower limit A Number of turns 2000 x number of power wire loops Measurement current range upper limit A Number of turns 16 x number of power wire loops The table below shows examples of how display range and measurement current range change according to the number of CT turns and the number of CT power wire loops Measurement current range is shown in parentheses l o e loo 1 time 0 0to8 7A 0 0 to 35 0A 0 0 to 70 0A 0 0 to 140 0A 0 0 to 350 0A 0 1 to 6 2A 0 2 to 25 0A 0 4 to 50 0A 0 8 to 100 0A 2 0 to 250 0A 2times 0 0to4 3A 0 0to17 5A 0 0 to 35 0A 0 0 to 70 0A 0 0 to 175 0A 0 1 to 3 1A 0 1 to 12 5A 0 2 to 25 0A 0 4 to 50 0A 1 0 to 125 0A 6times 0 0to1 4A 0 0to5 8A 0 0to11 6A 0 0 to 23
240. rerserereereceee 7 3 MODBUS ASCI scaccigceosddesaisrasaewvenns 8 3 MODBUS communications s ssisisrsridisisesis 8 1 MODBUS RTU sirorinsisnriiiasik npka k rani 8 4 MODE display setup s sessrreserereesesssuess 5 74 Mode indiCatorSsiscs2cdcars ci cecebecnanene caans 1 5 mode key function ss seeeeee seen ees 5 73 mode key operating procedures 2 7 Model selection table cs5 006 cssacesasaesanavaws 12 Mounting bracket 0 seseee eee eeeeeeee 3 3 Mounting procedures sessesssrrerererrerree 3 3 MV display setup eeee eee ee ee ee eee en ees 5 76 RIV Wiel Wit a A 5 40 MV high low littitss sitaiseetnasecmasvexeeres 5 40 TA lisesi EEEE AE EEEE 5 40 MV process essssseesssseoesesreeseereeeres 5 52 NI sececke muse pce aeseoreaes na aA S5214 N Noise Preventive Measures escris sssscssressas 4 10 Number of connectable units essssess 4 8 4 9 Numeric representation seseeeeeeeees 7 13 O OFF delays sccaskandeaseaharas ieoi 5 49 ON delay eresia kan inert sins EEREN NEES 5 49 ONOFF control scxcvenataepeseinawieceaad 5 9 5 13 Operation Modes esssssssesresrsssssere 2 9 Optional partS eeseerseseresseseerererresres 1 3 Output assign esses cece cece cece cece eee ees 5 54 Output at PV alarm e eeesssssseresersrssere Esta Onipitat READY sriiiresircrronesni rrerak Sal Output operation at changing Auto Manual 5 13 Output AMEE ssi a reece re kacn eben veer eeene
241. riable using the Heat Cool control C26 1 Whether or not this item is Cool MV M lated Setting is disabled foot Cae anipula 9 displayed is selected by the MV display setup C75 Upper display AT progress display Setting is disabled Displayed during execution of PV Numeric value at the 1 or more During execution of AT AT The display is continued Ak 1 1st digit right end Value is decreased even after completion of AT s digit 0 Completion of AT Whether or not this item is Display displayed is selected by the essa CT Current trans Setting is disabled former current value 1 eee Ye Current trans Setting is disabled Eee Weer current value 2 MV Manipulated 10 0 to 110 0 Variable Setting is disabled in AUTO mode Numeric value does not flash Setting is enabled in MANUAL mode Numeric value flashes MV display setup C75 Displayed when the optional model has two current transformer points Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the CT display setup C78 Internal Event 1 main setting Internal Event 1 sub setting ef Internal Event 1 ans remaining time Display example Internal Event 2 main setting Internal Event 2 sub setting eo z Internal Event 2 remaining time Display 9 example The allowable setting range may depending on the operation type of the internal event 1999 to 9999U Set value is other than the following values 0 to 99
242. rmination code is returned as a response message Numerical value zero Cannot be omitted Be sure to use 0000 Other unwanted Cannot be appended characters Range of available 0000H to FFFFH numerical values 7 13 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 6 List of Termination Codes When an error occurred in the application layer an abnormal termination code is returned as a response message Termination Description Remedies Example code Lo ee termination All the processing has normally completed a command Only the termination code is ss Other error returned but the message RX03E80001 processing is not performed Conversion error of a numerical value Processing is aborted just when a RS 1001W 100000 e A numerical value of 7 digits or more conversion error or a range error RS 01001W 1 e A figure other than 0 of which the has occurred RS 1001W 1 leading digit is 0 Processing is performed just WS 10 1W 1 e The conversion result is 65535 or before an error has occurred RDO3E9000 gt greater or 65536 or smaller RU0103E9 e Other obvious illegal representation of an integer 22 The value of written data is out of the Processing is continued excluding Example Specified specified range the word address in question range for 500W is 0 to 1 Processing aborted WS 5001W 3000 WD13890BB8 WU0013890BB8 23 Writing disabled due to instrument set Processing is continued excluding value conditions instrumen
243. rol output 2 NC side 250Vac 30Vdc 1A resistance load 50 000 cycles or more on NO side 100 000 cycles or more on NC side 5V 100mA 250ms e Voltage pulse output For SSR drive 19Vdc 15 82Q 0 5 Max 24mAdc a higher current might cause output circuit failure Max 100u A Ims when the time proportional cycle time is less than 10s 250ms when the time proportional cycle time is more than 10s 0 to 20mAdc or 4 to 20mAdc current output Max 600Q 0 5 FS under standard conditions However 1 0 FS in a range of 0 to ImA 2 points No voltage contact or open collector Max 250Q Min 100 KQ Max 1 0V 5 5Vdc 1V Approx 7 5mA at short circuit Approx 5 0mA at contact resistance of 2509 ls or more Current transformer input Number of input points Input object Current measurement lower limit Current measurement upper limit Allowable measured current Display range lower limit Display range upper limit Display accuracy Display resolution Event relay output Number of output points Output type Output rating Service life Min open close specifications RS 485 communication Transmission line Transmission speed Communication distance CPL MODBUS Communication protocol Number of connection units Terminating resistor Loader communication Transmission line Transmission speed Recommended cable Chapter 13 SPECIFICATIONS 2 points Cu
244. roup Derivative time of currently used PID group Manual reset of currently used PID group Output low limit of currently used PID group Output high limit of currently used PID group Proportional band for cool side of currently used PID group Integration time for cool side _ of currently used PID group Derivative time for cool side of currently used PID group Output low limit for cool side of currently used PID group Output high limit for cool side of currently used PID group 0 All settings are possible 1 Mode event operation display SP UF lock manual MV and mode key can be set Operation display SP UF lock manual MV and mode key can be set UF lock manual MV and mode key can be set RS 485 communication read write enabled RS 485 communication read write disabled Loader communication read write enabled Loader communication read write disabled EER is possible to register only Ea settings which can be displayed Example Manual reset of the PID constant can be registered when the Integral time is set at 0 The registered setting is added to the end of the display order of the basic display When two sets of passwords 1A and 1B 2A and 2B are matched the setting is possible mode key operation MV setting in MANUAL mode key lock password display and password 1A to 2B can be set when the key lock LoC is a value of 0 to 3
245. rrent transformer with 100 to 4 000 turns availability is by 100 turn units Optional unit Model No QN206A 800 turns hole diameter 5 8 mm Optional unit Model No QN212A 800 turns hole diameter 12mm 0 4Aac 800 turns 1 time Formula Number of turns 2000 x number of power wire loops 50 0Aac 800 turns 1 time Formula Number of turns 16 x number of power wire loops 70 0Aac 800 turns 1 time Formula Number of turns 16 x number of power wire loops x 1 4 0 0Aac 70 0Aac 800 turns time Formula Number of turns 16 x number of power wire loops x 1 4 5 FS 0 1Aac 0 to 3 points This may vary depending on the model SPST contact 3 points Common 2 points Each individual point 250Vac 30Vdc 2A Resistance load 100 000 cycles or more 5V 10mA Reference value 3 wire method 4800 9600 19200 38400 bps Max 500m Half duplex start stop synchronization method In conformity with CPL and MODBUS Max 31 units Connection prohibited 3 wire method Fixed at 19200 bps Specially designed cable 2m Model No 81440793 001 13 3 Chapter 13 SPECIFICATIONS Isolation between input and output Portions enclosed by solid lines are insulated from other signals i Control output 2 i Internal circuit Event output 1 x Loader communication Event output 2 x Digital input 1 Event output 3 Digital input 2 RS 485 communication Whether or not inputs and outputs are provided may vary d
246. rt this unit from the front of the panel 3 Fit the mounting bracket from the back of the panel 4 Push the mounting bracket against the panel until the hook of the mounting bracket is firmly engaged with the groove of the main body 5 Tighten the upper and lower screws of the mounting bracket CJ Handling Precautions e To fasten this controller onto the panel tighten a mounting bracket screws and turn one more half turn when there is no play between the bracket and panel Excessively tightening the screws may deform the controller case e It is possible to mount this unit without use of two gaskets if the waterproof feature is not needed and only the prevention of improper operation is aimed at 3 4 Chapter 3 INSTALLATION C15T Using the soft cover for panel mount type For panel mounting type it is possible to attach the soft cover to the front console The key can be operated with the soft cover kept attached Additionally when the soft cover is attached to the front console this provides the feature similar to the waterproof mounting using the gasket Items to be prepared Soft cover Part No 81446443 001 Optional unit Panel Main body Soft cover Soft cover Panel The gasket supplied with the main body is not used 1 Attach the soft cover so that it covers the console of the main body 2 Insert the uni
247. s In addition to the table format setup the operation and control status can be monitored using the trend display This unit can be operated without use of program on the host unit The unit is applicable to the IEC directive and the CE marking is put on the unit Applicable standards EN61010 1 and EN61326 1 The unit is applicable to the UL standard File No E96090 1 1 Chapter 1 OVERVIEW E Model selection table The following shows the model selection table of this unit Note 4 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 1 2 Basic Control Power A Additional supply 15 pcs PT T Specifications Panel mount type 0 to 5Vdc 0 to 10Vdc 0 to 20mAdc 4 to 20mAdc AC Model 100 to 240Vac DC Model 24Vac 24 to 48Vdc Control output 1 Control output 2 vo Voltage pulse output None for SSR drive Note 1 vc Voltage pulse output Current output for SSR drive Note 1 VV Voltage pulse output Voltage pulse output for SSR drive for SSR drive a wen eoe o T Thermocouple input K J E T R S B N PL Il WRe5 26 DIN U DIN L R RTD input Pt100 JPt100 L e DC voltage DC current input 0 to 1Vdc 1 to 5Vdc 01 Event relay output 3 points Note 1 02 Event relay output 3 points Note 3 Current transformer input 2 points Digital input 2 points Note 1 03 Event relay output 3 points Note 3 Current transformer input 2 points RS 485 communication
248. s measured for the first time In this case the internal event output is OFF for both of direct action and reverse action in the direct reverse setting To avoid that the output becomes OFF at power ON when used in reverse action set as follows Setting example For direct reverse setting of CT1 2 heater burnout over current or CT1 2 short circuit event select the direct action and set the reverse operation in DO assignment calculation of the event output terminal event terminal or control output terminal CT event direct action Normally open 0 Reverse gt DO output Normally open 0 Normally open 0 5 41 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Operation type Set value Direct action Reverse action of operation type Loop diagnosis 2 The event is turned ON when any change in PV corresponding to increase decrease in MV Manipulated variable is not observed This event is used to detect any fault at the operation end Setting items e Main setting MV Manipulated variable e Sub setting Change in PV from the point that the MV exceeds the main setting e ON delay time Diagnosis time Operation specifications The event is turned ON when the MV exceeding the main setting is held conditions 2 and the PV does not reach the value that the sub setting is added to subtracted from the PV at the point that the MV exceeds the main setting within the diagnosis time ON delay
249. s specified in 1 through 6 below Moreover you are required to provide your Equipment with fool proof design fail safe design anti flame propagation design and other designs of protection safety circuit on your own responsibility to ensure the reliability and safety whereby preventing problems caused by failure or nonconformity 1 For use under such conditions or in such environments as not stated in technical documents including catalogs specification and instruction manuals 2 For use of specific purposes such as Nuclear energy radiation related facilities For use outside nuclear energy controlled areas For use of Yamatake Limit Switch For Nuclear Energy Machinery or equipment for space sea bottom Transportation equipment Railway aircraft vessels vehicle equipment etc Antidisaster crime prevention equipment Burning appliances Electrothermal equipment Amusement facilities 3 Supply systems such as electricity gas water supply systems large scale communication systems and traffic air traffic control systems requiring high reliability 4 Facilities that are to comply with regulations of governmental public agencies or specific industries 5 Machinery or equipment that may affect human lives human bodies or properties 6 Other machinery or equipment equivalent to those set forth in items 1 to 5 above which require high reliability and safety 4 Precautions against long term use Use of Yamatake products
250. s the functional block diagram of the SP LSP system group Setting Setup C30 One LSP group exists Two or more LSP groups exist DI Assignment of LSP group LSP1 selection provided not provided Setting SP SP1 Setting DI Assignment DI1 1 to DI3 1 DI Assignment is not provided DI Assignment is provided LSP group number Logical operation of DI Setting LSP group number Setting General in operation display mode DI Assignment LSP 1 to 4 Setting SP SP1 to SP4 LSP value in use SP ramp unit Setting Setup C32 SP up ramp down ramp Setting Parameter SPU SPd DI Assignment of SP ramp enabled disabled Setting DI Assignment DI1 1 to DI3 1 SP low limit high limit Setting Setup C07 C08 Note LSP is a local SP and shows that the data is retained inside this unit On the contrary SP by the analog input from the outside is called RSP or remote SP However the RSP function is not provided on this unit 5 27 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION SP setup in operation display mode The set value for LSP in use of LSP1 to 4 can be set The LSP set value is different from the SP display value during SP ramp However the set value is displayed while the key is being operated to change the setting SP Operation display PV is SP low limit to SP high limit U Simple shown on Standard the upper High function display e When bit 1 SP display of the PV SP di
251. sed for more than 2s the displayed value is set and the display changes from flashing to continuously lit 5 on the lower display indicates that the current set value for event hysteresis is 5 Similarly use 2 44 to set a hysteresis value for event 2 and 3 44 to set a hysteresis value for event 3 List of parameter Essential parameters for PV measurement and control Basic parameters __ Required parameters when using optional functions rh Li t f ti d F ee Extended tuning bank Is 0 opera ion Isp ays Display Item Contents Initial value Seting value AREY AT type 0 Normal_1 Immediate response 2 Stable 1 1 Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value ariba e cust OTTER setting band 0 00 to 10 00 0 30 Upper display PV SPE e lag constant 0 0 to 999 9 0 0 Lower display SP AE F Proportional band tuning factor at AT 0 00 to 99 99 1 00 PV SP Target value SP low limit to SP
252. sesesosssssosssooesosessosssses 13 1 E Accessories and optional parts ceee cece eee c eee eeeeeees 13 5 Appendix Glossary 66 eee eee eee eee e eee e cent ence eee e eee seeeeeenees Appendix 1 Index xii Conventions Used in This Manual The following conventions are used in this manual CJ Handling Precautions Handling Precautions indicate items that the user should pay attention to when handling the SDC15 GS This indicates the item or page that the user is requested to refer to Note Notes indicate useful information that the user might benefit by knowing 1 2 8 The numbers with the parenthesis indicate steps in a sequence or indicate corresponding parts in an explanation para mode etc These indicate keys on the keyboard of this unit and messages and menus that appear on the personal computer screen gt gt This indicates the operation results and the status after operation Numeric value and character display on LED Numeric values The 7 segment LED expresses numeric values as follows Alphabetical characters The 7 segment LED expresses alphabetical characters shown below There are some alphabetical characters which are not displayed on the LED C Handling Precautions As shown above numeric value 2 and alphabetic character Z are shown in the same manner Accordingly numeric value 5 and alphabetic character S as well as
253. setting DO L ILI 1 Latched Latched when turned ON Assignment bank 2 Latched Latched when turned OFF except Control output 2 Latch for initialization at power ON Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 1 Latch Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 2 Latch Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 3 Latch Setup setting DO Assignment bank e When the object control output is the relay output or voltage pulse output and the operation type of the DO Assignment is set for output bit functions 1 to 4 the display and setting can be made e When the object event output is provided and the operation type of the DO Assignment is set for output bit functions 1 to 4 the display and setting can be made e To release the latch status it is necessary to turn OFF the power and turn it ON again to release all DO latches key operation or communication or to change the latch setting of the DO Assignment to 0 none 5 57 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E DO Assignment setting with Smart Loader Package SLP C35 5 58 am Input Output port setup When setting DO Assignment with the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 select Edit E Input Output port setup O in that order from the menu The output bit function output assign polarity of output assign and polarity of output bit function can be easily set using visual images as shown below Select the output
254. setting Event bank Internal Event 2 OFF delay Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 3 ON delay Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 3 OFF delay Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 4 ON delay Parameter setting Event bank Internal Event 4 OFF delay Parameter setting Event bank 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other than 0 18 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other than 0 1s 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other than O 1s 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other than O 1s 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other than O 1s 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other than O 1s 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other than O 1s 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other than 0 1s 0 0s or Os 0 0s or Os 0 0s or Os 0 0s or Os 0 0s or Os 0 0s or Os 0 0s or Os 5 49 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Internal Event 5 ON delay 0 0 to 999 9s Delay time unit is O 1s 0 0s or Os High function Parameter setting Event 0 to 9999s Delay time unit is other fe bank 0 1s Interna
255. splay setup setup C74 is set at 1 display is provided the display and setting can be made m LSP system group The LSP system group can be selected LSP system group O FM 1to4 1 Simple Setup setting Setup bank H Standard High function E LSP1 to 4 The set values can be set for four LSP groups SP low limit to SP high limit U Simple oe setting SP Standard bank High function e The display and setting can be made for the LSP system group selected in LSP system group setup C30 E LSP group number The LSP group number can be set Item Setting display bank Display Initial Initial value e User level LSP group number LSP Numeric value at the rightmost digit of the Simple Operation display _ display Standard 1 to LSP system group High function e When the LSP system group setup C30 is set at 2 or more and bit 2 LSP group number display of the PV SP display setup setup C74 is set at 1 display is provided the display can be made e When the display is possible and the DI Assignment of the LSP group selection is not performed the setting can be made 5 28 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E DI Assignment of LSP group selection The LSP group selection can be set for internal contacts to 3 using the DI Assignment DI Assignment Internal 0 No function Simple Contacts 1 to 3 1 LSP group selection 0 1 Standard Assignment bank 4 to 20 O
256. ssages are sent and the device stands by for reception of STX e Number of word addresses accessible by a single frame Description of command EEPROM area AD Hexadecimal format read sommar 28 7 3 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 4 List of data link layer data definitions The following list shows the definitions for data in the data link layer Data name Character code Number of Meaning of data characters es ee es Start of message address 0 to 7FH are Saeed as Identification of device hexadecimal character codes to communicate with End position of the application layer Checksum OOH to FFH are expressed as two Checksum of message digit hexadecimal character codes Se ee Description of data items STX 02H When STX is received the device judges this to be the start of the send message For this reason the device returns to the initial state whatever reception state it was in and processing is started on the assumption that the STX the first character has been received The purpose of this is to enable recovery of the device s response at the next correct message e g RETRY message from the master station in the event that noise for example causes an error in the sent message Station address Of the messages sent by the master station the device creates response messages only when station addresses are the same Station addresses in messages are expressed as two digit
257. ssages are expressed as two hexadecimal characters The station address is set up by the station address setup setup setting C65 However when the station address is set to 0 30H 30H the device creates no response even if station addresses match The device returns the same station address as that received as the response message Checksum LRC This value is for checking whether or not some abnormality e g noise causes the message content to change during communications The checksum is expressed as two hexadecimal characters The method to calculate a checksum is as follows 1 Add the data from the top up to just before the checksum Note that the values to be added are not the ASCII character values in the send message but the one byte binary data converted from two ASCII characters 8 3 Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 2 Take 2 s complement of the addition result 3 Convert the low order one byte of the addition result to a character code The following is a sample checksum calculation Sample message 3AH start of the message 0 30H first byte of the station address A 41H second byte of the station address 0 30H first byte of the read command 3 33H second byte of the read command 0 30H first byte of the start word address 3 33H second byte of the start word address E 45H third byte of the start word address 9 39H fourth byte of the start word address
258. sseocsoseesossseos 5 54 M Polarity of output assign 6i4s4s0sccrssdscsrcsnioseredsesrernsnasvenes 5 56 E Polarity of output bit function ssssssssesesesesesessssessssss 5 57 M Lal heersisiieysissetenrrons dni eirt ara EN 5 57 E DO Assignment setting with Smart Loader Package SLP C35 5 58 5 11 Application Examples lt 65204 lt lt ia csceseceseassectersssceescauossseaus ane 5 59 m Examples of applications using assign functions 5 59 5 12 Continuous Output esessssessssesssssesossssoccssesoossesooseseesoe 5 66 eE E a E E E T T 5 66 E Output type er ee eee ee eer ree Sevaesaee 5 66 E Output scaling low limit high limit sees ee eee eee eee eee eee 5 67 E MY scaling range 16220 225 lt s0ns creeren cake naecaserenessesanesabans 5 68 5 13 CT Current Transformer Input se0 lt 0006s seeeesesdsaseeeenendewsas 5 69 MCT type LA chia E E E A PEPE 5 70 E CT output essessssessssssosssssossssesossscsossseocsoseecosssees 5 70 E CT measurement wait time esesscsesssscossssscossssscsesse 5 70 ix E Number of CT turns and number of CT power wire loops 5 71 5 14 Console Display and Key Operation 0 cece cece eee e cece ces eceeees 5 73 E Key op ration type scssisscsiacssckissisessasiiestasisnsavenevssveden 5 73 E mode key function Re Te re ery re er ener ean cen 5 73 E MODE display setup LERCH ESS E E ERE NERA EERO
259. ssword lock cannot be unlocked contact Yamatake or its dealer By returning the setting to the initial setting at Yamatake s factory the password lock can be unlocked In this case note that the data which has been set by the customer cannot be saved retained 5 84 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA List of Operation Displays Chapter 6 6 1 The following shows the meanings of the values stated in the User Level column 0 Simple Standard or High function configuration 1 Standard or High function configuration and 2 High function configuration E Operation displays Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Upper display PV SP Target value SP low limit C07 to SP high limit Whether or not this item is Lower display SP C08 displayed is selected by the PV SP display setup C74 GP LSP group number 1 to LSP system group C30 Max 4 L Numeric value at 1st Displayed when LSP system group C30 is 2 or more Display ie the right end The lower display shows the example digit LSP set value corresponding Lower display to the LSP group number Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the PV SP display setup C74 In the ON OFF control CtrL 0 100 0 is displayed at ON and 0 0 is displayed at OFF Whether or not this item is displayed is selected by the MV display setup C75 Heat MV Manipulated Setting is disabled This item is displayed when Va
260. strictly observe the following cautions Control output 1 When any of Output assign A B C D ot1 2 to ot1 5 is set at 49 Control output 1 status do not set 1 Reverse for the same symbol of Output assign A B C D Polarity Event output 1 When any of Output assign A B C D ev1 2 to ot1 5 is set at 48 Event output 1 status do not set 1 Reverse for the same symbol of Output assign A B C D Polarity Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Polarity of output bit function The polarity after the output bit function functions 1 to 4 can be set Control output 1 Polarity 0 Direct High function Setup setting DO 1 Reverse Assignment bank Control output 2 Polarity Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 1 Polarity Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 2 Polarity Setup setting DO Assignment bank Event output 3 Polarity Setup setting DO Assignment bank e When the object control output is the relay output or voltage pulse output and the operation type of the DO Assignment is set for output bit functions 1 to 4 the display and setting can be made e When the object event output is provided and the operation type of the DO Assignment is set for output bit functions to 4 the display and setting can be made E Latch The latch of the output ON status or output OFF status can be set Control output 1 Latch 3 171 0 None High function Setup
261. t the manipulated variable MV is set to Preset MANUAL value C20 when the AUTO mode is changed to the MANUAL mode e When the control method is other than ON OFF control CtrL 0 Output operation at changing Auto Manual C19 and Preset MANUAL value C20 can be displayed and set e When the Heat Cool control is not used C26 0 the initial value of Preset MANUAL value C20 is 0 0 On the contrary when the Heat Cool control is used C26 1 this initial value becomes 50 0 CJ Handling Precautions When the unit is in the MANUAL mode if the power is turned ON the set value of C20 becomes the manipulated variable MV E ON OFF control The ON OFF control related items can be set Differential for ON OFF Cre 0to9999U Simple control Parameter d re Standard setup Parameter bank High function T ON OFF control action Z Z 1999 to 9999U High function point offset Parameter setup Parameter bank e Differential for ON OFF control dIFF and ON OFF control action point offset OFFS can be displayed and set when the control method is the ON OFF control CtrL 0 e The following Figure shows the operation of the ON OFF control gt lt dIFF i ji dIFF ON lt gt SP oFFS SP oFFS Py PV Heat control Reverse action Cool control Direction action shows that the ON OFF is changed at this value O shows that the ON OFF is changed at a point that 1U is added to this value
262. t 4b Control output 1 MV scaling Control output 2 type a Control output 2 scaling low limit g Control output 2 scaling high limit Control output 2 MV scaling 0 MV 1 Heat MV for heat cool control 2 Cool MV for heat cool control 3 PV 4 PV before ratio bias and filter 5 SP 6 Deviation 7 CT1 current value 8 CT2 current value 9 MFB Invalid on SDC15 10 SP MV 11 PV MV 1999 to 9999 The decimal point position may vary depending on control output 1 type C43 0 to 9999 The decimal point position and unit are same as for PV 0 MV 1 Heat MV for heat cool control 2 Cool MV for heat cool control 3 PV 4 PV before ratio bias and filter 5 SP 6 Deviation 7 CT1 current value 8 CT2 current value 9 MFB Invalid on SDC 15 1999 to 9999 The decimal point position may vary depending on control output 2 type C48 0 to 9999 The decimal point position and unit are same as for PV Displayed when control output 1 of the model is the current output The decimal point position of the scaling low limit high limit becomes 1 digit after the decimal point when the control output 1 type is related to the MV and CT When the control output 1 type is related to the PV and SP the decimal point position becomes the same as that of the PV If the controller model uses current output for control output 1 and if the control output 1 type is SP MV or PV MV this se
263. t be changed The user level is set to Standard configuration or High function configuration and more advanced functions are set After that when the setup is returned to Simple configuration this function setup cannot be displayed but the function itself is operated 2 3 Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS Operation Modes The following shows the transition of operation modes RUN READY AUTO MANUAL AT ST RUN AUTO mode AT stop de stop Na READY AUTO mode AT running ST running RUN READY AT stop lt ag ST stop AUTO MANUAL AUTO MANUAL RUN MANUAL mode RUN MANUAL mode AT stop RUN READY AT stop ST stop ST stop Control status Control stop status Automatic operation This unit automatically determines the MV values Manual operation The MV values are operated manually Auto tuning The PID constants are set automatically using the limit cycle Self tuning The PID constants are set automatically while the control is kept continuously 2 9 Chapter 3 INSTALLATION A CAUTION Use the SDC15 within the operating ranges recommended in the specifications temperature humidity voltage vibration shock mounting direction atmosphere etc Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation Do not block ventilation holes Doing so might cause fire or
264. t bit function 1 to 4 Setting DI Assignment Input bit function DI1 2 to DI3 2 Polarity Input bit function Polarity Setting DI Assignment DI1 8 to DI3 8 Setting DI Assignment DI1 8 to DI3 8 Internal Contact Input bit function result Operation type Setting DI Assignment DI1 1 to DI3 1 Event channel def Setting DI Assignment DI1 9 to DI3 9 g Handling Precautions Even though three internal contacts 1 to 3 are provided the number of digital inputs determined by the optional model is O to 2 points With the default settings before shipment the operations of digital input 1 to 2 have already been connected to internal contacts 1 to 2 To utilize the operation of internal contact 3 it is absolutely necessary to set the DI Assignment 5 32 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Operation type The operation type by the internal contact function can be set Internal Contact 1 d f 0 to 20 Operation type Setup d For details about function by each set value setting DI Assignment bank refer to the Table below Simple Standard High function 11 oe Internal Contact 2 Operation type Setup di E l setting DI Assignment bank Internal Contact 3 Operation a i type Setup setting DI al Assignment bank C Handling Precautions e For 1 to 3 LSP group selection the value that 1 is added to the sum of weights 1 2 4 the internal contact of which is turned
265. t end 1st digit Polarity A 0 Direct 1 Reverse 0 2nd di Polarity B 0 3rd digit Polarity C 0 4th digit Polarity D 0 a 4 5 to dt 3 5 Intemal contact 1 to 3 Polarity 0 Direct 1 Reverse 0 a iF toa 3 4 Internal contact 1 to 3 0 Every Internal Event 0 Event channel def 1 to 5 Internal Event No Changing the user level e nbs DO assignment bank Display Item Contents Initial value Setting value This controller s user level can be set to 1 of 3 types in setup ot to ok Operation type Control output 1 to 2 0 Default output 1 to 2 MV1 to 2 0 C79 Euh fto Bud Event output 1 to 3 3 to 6 Function 1 to 4 ok 2 to ok2 2 Output assign A Control output 1 to 2 0 Normally opened 1 Normally closed 14 Output 1 The num r of ibl i la n ttin d r Eu L tour Event output 1 to 3 2 to 6 Internal Event 1 to 5 15 Output 2 e bs ber o poss ble d sp ysa d se gs dec eases 7 to 13 Undefined 1410 15 MV1to2 2 Event 1 according to the user level high function gt standard gt sim 16 to 17 Undefined 18 to 19 DI1 to 2 3 Event 2 20 to 25 Undefined 4 Event 3 ple All items are displayed when high function is selected ok 4 3 to ake 3 Output assign B Control output 1 to 2 26 to 28 Internal Contact 1 to 3 0 Eu id tofu Event output 1 to 3 29 to 33 Undefined 34 to 37 DI1 to 4 38 MANUAL 39 READY 40 Undefined ok 4 4 to oke 4 Output assign C Control output 1 to 2 41 AT ru
266. t external the word address in question conditions etc Writing reading disabled because Only the termination code is communications loader locked returned but the message processing is not performed Read write word count error Only the termination code is RS 1001W 100 returned but the message RDO3E90064 processing is not performed 4 Word address out of the range Only the termination code is RS 100000W 1 e Out of the range between 256 and returned but the message RDO3G90001 65534 processing is not performed RU00 3E903EA WS 03E9W 1 WDOXXxX0001 WU0003E9001 42 Value of data out of the specified range Processing is performed up to the WS 2101W 100 XXX e 32769 or smaller or 32768 or greater word address in question the WS 2101W 100000 succeeding processing is not WD03E900010XXX performed 7 14 Chapter 7 CPL COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS 7 7 Reception and Transmission Timing E Timing specifications for instruction and response message The cautions below are required with regard to the timing to transmit a instruction message from the master station and a response message from the slave station Response monitor time The maximum response time from the end of the instruction message transmission by the master station until when the master station receives a response message from the slave station is two seconds 1 in the figure below So the response monitor time should be set to two seconds Generally when a response tim
267. t using the operation type of the DO Assignment Control output 1 Operation Default output High function type Setup setting DO bank MV1 MV2 Control output 2 Operation OCE Function 1 A and B or C and D type Setup setting DO bank Function 2 A or B hy C or D Event output 1 Operation Function 3 A or B or C or D type Setup setting DO bank Function 4 A and B and C and D Event output 2 Operation Eug l type Setup setting DO bank Event output 3 Operation J type Setup setting DO bank uI e When the object control output is the relay output or voltage pulse output the display and setting can be made e When the object event output is provided the display and setting can be made e MV1 is the ON OFF control output time proportional output and time proportional output heat of the Heat Cool control e MV2 is the time proportional output cool of the Heat Cool control e When the set value is 0 default output the operation becomes as follows according to the output Control output 1 Control output status of MV 1 is output Control output 2 Control output status of MV2 is output Event output 1 Result of Internal Event 1 is output Event output 2 Result of Internal Event 2 is output Event output 3 Result of Internal Event 3 is output e In the output bit function the logical operations AND OR of each control output and each event output are combined In output
268. t with the soft cover attached from the front of the panel 3 Fit the mounting bracket from the back of the panel 4 Push the mounting bracket against the panel until the hook of the mounting bracket is firmly engaged with the groove of the main body 5 Tighten the upper and lower screws of the mounting bracket CJ Handling Precautions To fasten this controller onto the panel tighten a mounting bracket screws and turn one more half turn when there is no play between the bracket and panel Excessively tightening the screws may deform the controller case 3 5 Chapter 3 INSTALLATION C15S Socket mount type Items to be prepared Phillips head screwdriver DIN rail Stopper hole Main body The above Figure shows the DIN rail mounting 1 Mount the socket inside the panel For screw tightening mount the socket directly 2 Perform the wiring to the socket 3 Push this unit into the socket 4 Put the upper and lower socket stoppers in the stopper holes in the main body and then insert them C Handling Precautions For socket mount type it is necessary that the wiring must be completed before mounting this unit on the socket 3 6 Chapter 4 WIRING 4 1 Wiring 7 WARNING Before removing mounting or wiring the SDC15 be sure to turn off the power to the SDC15 and all connected devices Failure to do so might cause electric shock Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power
269. tches display of C73 MODE display setup is set at 0 no display do Lt Release all DO latches cannot be displayed and set E Communication DI digital input 1 Communication DI digital input 1 can be set Communication DI digital 7 1 DI oF Communication DI1 OFF i Simple input 1 L Communication value is 0 Standard Parameter setting Mode DI ON Communication DI1 ON High function bank Communication value is 1 e Four communication DIs DI1 to DI4 are provided However only communication DI 1 can be set using the key operation e The function operation with communication DI 1 can be set using the DI Assignment e When bit 5 Communication DI 1 display of C73 MODE display setup is set at 0 no display C DI1 Communication DI 1 cannot be displayed and set 5 8 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION 5 3 Control The following shows the functional block diagram of the control ON OFF control PID control RationaLOOP control and Heat Cool control etc ON OFF control Control method ON OFF control Setting Parameter CtrL must be set at 0 Branching according to RUN READY mode selection READY mode Branching according to Branching according to output at READY output operation at PV alarm Setting Setup C17 Setting Setup C15 C17 gt 0 0 C17 lt 0 0 PV is correct or C15 0 PV is faulty AL01 02 occurs and C15 1 MV
270. ternal Contact 3 0 to 33 function 1 to 4 dl3 2 0 Input assign B Internal Contact 3 Input assign C Internal Contact 3 Input assign D Internal Contact 3 Same as Internal Contact 1 Polarity Polarity A to D AtoD 1st digit Polarity A The following setting applies to each 2nd digit Polarity B digit 3rd digit Polarity C 0 Direct 4th digit Polarity D 1 Reverse di 4A Internal Contact 3 0 Direct 2 Polarity 1 Reverse I Internal Contact 3 0 Every Internal Event 2 Displayed when the Event channel def 1 to 5 Internal Event No operation type of internal contact 3 is timer stop start dI3 1 17 Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA E DO Assignment bank Bank selection gf Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level Control output 1 0 Default output Displayed when control Operation type 1 MV 1 ON OFF control output time output 1 of the model is relay proportional output and time output or voltage pulse proportional output heat of output Heat Cool control When using control output 1 MV2 Time proportional output the default output is MV1 cool of Heat Cool control Function 1 A and B or C and D Function 2 A or B and C or D Function 3 A or B or C or D Function 4 A and B and C and D Control output 1 Normally opened OFF 0 Displayed when control Output assign A Normally closed ON 1 output 1 of the model is relay Internal Event 1 output or
271. ternal Event 1 Setting 9 Deviation high low limit Final SP reference Input assign B 11 Internal Event 2 26 During SP ramp Setting 32 Timer Status DIx 5 0 Normally opened 18 COM DI 1 Normally Off 0 Input assign C Input assign D DIx 6 0 Normally opened 11 Internal Event 2 Normally Off 0 Setting 32 Timer Status DIx 7 0 Direct 0 Direct DIx 7 DIx 7 DIx 7 DIx 8 DIx 9 Polarity A Polarity B 1 Reverse 1 Reverse Polarity C 0 Direct 0 Direct Polarity D 0 Direct 0 Direct Polarity 1 Reverse 0 Direct Event channel def Note The internal DI No is indicated at the mark of x shown in the Display column Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Others C72 mode key function 7 COM DI selection SP up ramp down ramp Desired value Setting points The internal EV 1 is substituted for the guarantee soak Therefore 9999 is set to the hysteresis of Event 1 so that Event 1 is not turned OFF after it has been turned ON even though the PV fluctuates DI Assignment Internal Contact 1 Input Output port setup Input Output port setup Function Function2 Function3 Function4 A B 18 COM DI1 11 Internal event2 Setup 4 Deviation high li Internal Contac a vy 0 Normally open normally eff 0 v D Logical AND of COM DI1 a contact Reversed at this point since the Mode RUN READY selection and timer b contact
272. the following operations from 0 to 7 which have been set previously can be executed 0 Mode key does not operate Initial value 1 AUTO MANUAL mode selection RUN READY mode selection AT Auto Tuning start stop selection LSP Local SP group selection Release all DO Digital Output latches Mode key does not operate ON OFF selection of communication DI e When pressing the mode key in the setup display mode the display is changed to the operation display para key e This key is used to change the display item e When this key is kept pressed for 2 sec or longer in the operation display mode the display is then changed to the setup display lt v A keys These keys are used to increase or decrease the numeric value or to shift the digit Loader connector The Smart Loader connector is on the bottom of the SDC15 Flowchart of key operations and displays When the power
273. ther functions Operation type 2 LSP group selection 0 2 High function Setup setting DI 3 LSP group selection 0 4 e Details of LSP group selection with the internal contact function The following shows the LSP group selection value according to the ON OFF status of each internal contact LSP group selection 0 1 OFF 0 ON 1 LSP group selection 0 2 OFF 0 ON 2 LSP group selection 0 4 OFF 0 ON 4 The value that 1 is added to the sum of the LSP group selection values according to the ON OFF status of each internal contact becomes the LSP group number For example when the sum of LSP group selection values of internal contact 1 to 3 is 1 the LSP group number becomes 2 e Even though the LSP system group is 1 the display and setting can be made but the LSP group selection with the internal contact function becomes invalid 5 29 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E SP ramp unit The unit of the SP up down ramp can be set SP ramp unit J J 0 0 1U s High function Setup setting Setup bank JC 1 0 1U min 2 0 1U h e 0 1U shows that the decimal point position of the PV is shifted one digit rightward Example When the thermocouple input is in a range of 200 to 1200 C 0 1U is 0 1 C Example When the DC voltage input is in a range of 0 0 to 100 0 0 1U is 0 01 For the relationship between the decimal point position and the type of PV input range refer to the next section
274. this value O shows that the ON OFF is changed at a point that 1U is added to this value Main setting PV gt ON HYS i Main setting pv a frvst ON ON HYS s4 Main setting Sub setting PV gt f HYS ON SP Main setting PV gt gt ON HYS f SP Main setting pv gt lt ont ys frvst ON r lt T gt m Main setting Sub setting PV gt SP Same as the direct action of the deviation high limit when the SP ramp is not used The difference is that the SP ramp does not use the current SP but it uses the final SP Same as the direct action of the deviation low limit when the SP ramp is not used The difference is that the SP ramp does not use the current SP but it uses the final SP Same as the direct action of the deviation high low limit when the SP ramp is not used The difference is that the SP ramp does not use the current SP but it uses the final SP Reverse action shows that the ON OFF is changed at this value O shows that the ON OFF is changed at a point that 1U is added to this value Always OFF gt ON HYS Main setting PV gt lt HYS i ON Main setting PV gt lt gt Y HYSA ON HYSY gt lt O Main setting Sub setting PV gt HYS SP Main setting PV gt vs F ON SP Main setting Main seting Sub sting py gt Same as
275. time conditions 1 CAUTION When setting the ON delay it is necessary to put in High function configuration The default setting of the ON delay before shipment is 0 0s Heat control Cool control PV PV PV to be used Area satisfying i Sub settin as reference f 77773 i Area saisin JEtbsetin PV to be used poao oes conditions 1 5 0 or more as reference HYS i t i Area satistyin i Area satisfyin MV conditions z r my conditions g Main setting i Main setting Conditions 3 Conditions 3 ON delay i ON delay set time on set time ON Ey c ey Time Time ON delay is started when conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied ON delay is started when conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied 5 42 Set value of operation type Operation type Loop diagnosis 3 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Direct action Reverse action The event is turned ON when any change in PV corresponding to increase decrease in MV Manipulated variable is not observed This event is used to detect any fault at the operation end Setting items e Main setting Change in PV from the point that the MV reaches the high limit 100 or low limit 0 e Sub setting Range of absolute value of deviation PV SP allowing the event to turn OFF e ON delay time Diagnosis time e OFF delay time A period of time from power ON allowing the ev
276. time or longer e The event is turned OFF when DI OFF continues for OFF delay time e In other cases the current status is continued DI ON ON delay OFF delay i es ON Internal event CAUTION Time gt When setting the ON delay and OFF delay it is necessary to put in High function configuration The default settings of the ON delay and OFF delay before shipment are 0 0s The default setting of the event channel designation of the DI assignment before shipment is O In this case the timer event start stop can be set for all internal events from one internal contact Dl Additionally as one or more event channel designation is set the timer event start stop can be set for one internal event specified by one internal contact Dl However when setting the event channel of the DI assignment it is necessary to put in High function configuration Invalid in this unit ON OFF status is undetermined Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION E Operation type The operation type of the internal event can be set Internal Event 1 Configuration 1 Operation type Setup setting Event Configuration bank Internal Event 2 Configuration 1 Operation type Setup setting Event Configuration bank Internal Event 3 Configuration 1 Operation type Setup setting Event Configuration bank Internal Event 4 Configuration 1 Operation type Setup setting Event Configuration bank I
277. tion bank 0 Direct 1 Reverse Internal Event 2 2nd digit Standby setup Configuration 2 Operation type Setup setting Event Configuration bank None Standby Standby Standby at SP change 3rd digit EVENT state at READY setup 0 Continued 1 Forced OFF 4th digit Undefined 0 Undefined Internal Event 3 Configuration 2 Operation type Setup setting Event Configuration bank Internal Event 4 Configuration 2 Operation type Setup setting Event Configuration bank Internal Event 5 Configuration 2 Operation type Setup setting Event Configuration bank e When the internal event configuration 1 operation type is set at 0 No event the internal event configuration 2 direct reverse standby and EVENT state at READY is not displayed e For details about internal event operation with the direct reverse setting CF List of internal event operations on pages 5 39 to 5 44 CJ Handling Precautions e Standby is a function that does not turn ON the event even though the event currently used satisfies the ON conditions before polarity when the instrument power is turned ON or when the READY mode is changed to the RUN mode The event is turned ON when the ON conditions are satisfied again once the OFF conditions have been satisfied e Standby Standby at SP change means that the standby is set again when the SP is changed SP value and LSP group number in addition to the standby functions However
278. tis 5 66 Output scaling sssssrescssrresenrsreresssrers 5 67 Opit ty pei ssiw ranyin tapaea 5 66 Over voltage category sees eee ee eee eeee 13 5 P Panel mount type e eee cece eee ee eee ees 1 2 3 3 Password s40s40s000ene se0ae cane se dee ow eee nee 5 84 Phase angle control esessssesseserreeecrereee 4 2 PID conttolntscancscveeeacsceveccsaentacasendan 5 14 Polarity of function ssseeeeeeeeeee 5 36 5 57 Polarity Of input AMBIPN sisae rece esrenereneers 5 36 Polarity of output assivms si aciesciacenccsenese 5 56 Preset MANUAL Vali vs cacccscsccncsccceasec 5 13 Proportional band s ssssesssseerereererreere 5 14 E e E A E ETT 5 5 PY Alef eiseririirsrrissit rirun eer 5 6 PV high limit alarm esessssesseserrererrereee 5 6 PY eh limitsicsccnciovccaseaceniesedeereascs 5 6 PY high lit ctsccccocepiasdarssaseorcisennss 5 39 PV ii hae litiillicess vincsareresessicuescoivers 5 39 0 EEE OE 5 6 PV input calibration seeressereresrerrerse 11 2 PV input calibration RTD input ssssesseess 11 3 PV input calibration Thermocouple input 11 3 PY inpot faites vers esnetcersetnceesiceswaye 10 2 PV input range high limit eeeee eee 5 5 PY input range low liniit s s lt s e0eesvsecanens 5 5 PV input range type ssssssssssssesssss 5 1 32 PY pE eaa 2 1 5 1 PY low limt alatitiwsssccciaceacccnsiaceiaccacas 5 6 PY iow imiterte narei a PV low Lidice xo ceed ad sadnsad dacs sarersoaveny 5 39 PY
279. to 200 0 C Operation value shows that the ON OFF is changed at this value Event type Direct action Reverse action shows that the ON OFF is changed at this value O shows that the ON OFF is changed at a point that 1U is added to this value Always OFF O shows that the ON OFF is changed at a point that 1U is added to this value Always OFF O HYS Main setting py HYS ON ON O Main setting O ON HYS HYS ON O Main setting Main setting Pv Pv 200 to 400 C Pt100 50 0 to 100 0 C 0 to 600 C JPt100 50 0 to 100 0 C 200 to 400 C Pt100 0 to 200 0 C 0 to 1600 C JPt100 0 to 200 0 C 0 to 1600 C Pt100 0 to 500 C 0 to 1800 C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1300 C 0 to 1400 C 0 to 2300 C 200 to 400 C ZOO DI AMCC CjAIAAA ALA JPt100 Sensor type 0 to 500 C Range 100 to 800 C Oto 1V Scaling range is 1 to 5V 1999 to 9999 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 0 to 20mA Initial value 1 PL Il thermocouple is a range which has been added to the units manufactured form July 2003 2 The indicated low limit for a B thermocouple is 20 C However if ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank 22 is prior to 2 04 the value is 180 C 4 to 20mA 3 Thermocouple RTD and DC voltage DC current are according to PV No
280. tput type of the model is C Current the control output becomes the continuous output analog output When the model has two control outputs the heat cool control can be used only with Simple configuration Event output When the model provides the event the alarm or control mode set in Event type can be output as DO digital output DI digital input When the model provides the DI the function set with the DI assignments can be selected CT current transformer input When the model provides the CT input the heater burnout alarm can be output from the event output 2 1 Chapter 2 OUTLINE OF FUNCTIONS 2 2 Key Operation Various displays or settings can be called up on the console through key operation Two kinds of general key operation flows are provided standard key operation type and special key operation type A desired key operation type can be selected using the setup setting e Standard key operation type Key operation similar to that of the conventional model SDC10 e Special key operation type A part of key operation of the conventional model SDC30 is added to that of the conventional model SDC10 The following describes the general flow of each key operation type E Standard key operation type When the key operation mode type of the setup setting C71 is set at 0 the standard key operation type is selected The display and setting data of the standard key operation type are arranged
281. tting is displayed Displayed when control output 2 of the model is the current output The decimal point position of the scaling low limit high limit becomes 1 digit after the decimal point when the control output 2 type is related to the MV and CT When the control output 2 type is related to the PV and SP the decimal point position becomes the same as that of the PV If the controller model uses current output for control output 2 and if the control output 2 type is SP MV or PV MV this setting is displayed CJ Handling Precautions e If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank t z is prior to 2 04 SP MV and PV MV cannot be set in Control output 1 type Control output 2 type and Auxiliary output type e If ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank tziz is prior to 2 04 SP MV and PV MV cannot be set in Control output 1 MV scaling Control output 2 MV scaling and Auxiliary output MV scaling Chapter 6 LIST OF DISPLAYS AND SETTING DATA Display Item Contents Initial User Remarks value level 4 CPL MODBUS 0 CPL Displayed when the optional 1 MODBUS ASCII format model has RS 485 2 MODBUS RTU format Station address 0 to 127 Communication is disabled when a T 0 Transmission speed 0 4800bps 2 1 9600bps 2 19200bps 3 38400bps Data format 0 7 bits Data length 1 8 bits 54 Data format Parity 0 Even parity 1 Odd parity 2 No parity Data format Stop bit
282. ture extension 5252 Reserved for future extension 5253 Ld Ed eal Ea EA X 9 2 Chapter 9 LIST OF COMMUNICATION DATA Bank Item name RAM address EEPROM address EEPROM Decimal point Remarks Setup DI Assignment Note 1 Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension CPL MODBUS Station address Transmission speed Data format Data length Data format Parity Data format Stop bit Response time out Key operation type mode key function MODE display setup PV SP display setup MV display setup EV display setup Timer remain time display setup CT display setup User level Communication monitor display Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension Reserved for future extension CT1 turns Number of CT1 power wire loops CT2 turns Number of CT2 power wire loops Internal Contact 1 Operation type Internal Contact 1 Input bit function Inter
283. ty GA 0 Even parity Same as above 1 Odd parity 2 No parity Data format Stop bit 59 0 1 stop bit Same as above 1 2 stop bits Response time out 1 to 250 ms al function function display and setup are available e If the communications type is set to MODBUS RTU format data format data length cannot be displayed nor set up and the action is fixed to 8 bit data 4 Handling Precautions e Setups can be performed through key operation on the console or the smart loader package SLP C35 However they cannot be performed via RS 485 communications e f you use the Yamatake CMC10L as an RS 232C RS 485 converter set the response time out C70 to 3 ms or longer 8 1 Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Communications procedures The communications procedure is as follows 1 The instruction message is sent from the host device master station to one SDC15 unit slave station to communicate with 2 The slave station receives the instruction message and performs read or write processing according to the content of the message 3 The slave station sends a message corresponding to the processing content as a response message 4 The master station receives the response message C Handling Precautions It is not allowed to use two or more number of protocols together on one and the same RS 485 transmission line such as CPL MODBUS ASCII format and MODBUS RTU format 8 2 Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNI
284. uib setting i issccdessrecdeasiandiasiqussaads 5 48 Sub address skis caerieecdiddieuwisangenuss 7 3 7 4 Index 3 iT Temperature unit ss reessssseereersse 5 1 5 3 Terminal assignment label ssssssseessreses 4 2 Terminal COVET iiescipesescneeiesednaances 13 45 Terminal part see cece reece eee ence eens 1 6 Terminating resistor rrsrsessrassessrcsns 4 2 4 6 Terimaan COE xed vewwidarssaudaeandsaena Tela Thermocouple sssssssssrssssssseerrereeeee we Tiehianing OIG UR aers arn rnes n easenet NEEN 13 5 Time proportional cycle mode ssssssess 5 52 Time proportional cycle sssssseressssssseee 5 52 Timer remain time display setup 5 77 Tipe scinoinisarsrnedako tubadest ia ri patkaka 5 44 TransiNO resres itki ther IERTE PIENE EROR cree 2 9 Transmission speed esessesseserrereerereee J l Tratisinission start Um cssirsrerseriiississ Tals U Upper display s rrrorrsriraessniroetari 5 23 25 User M0MCHONasassscieascccceaberganandcaaesns 5 79 User levelre pao aea 2 8 5 78 Voltage between terminals seseeeeee 4 8 W Waterproof mounting eessssssererrssese 3 3 Wi COMMANIC s lt s268 lt esseeansweccassaracee takaa 7 9 WD command 1504 seeses0s000eneeweeaneerene 7 9 Word address siics vies evseabacaasen 7 3 7 12 8 11 Write command JOH lt 4 lt s1 0e sscerscences 8 8 WS CGnniHantlecdisceociisckoiewtsevieusain dcaes Ten WS Contes iecehbetiecccddgeteias
285. uple T or RTD R 0 F E Cold junction Cold junction compensation T C Displayed when the PV input compensation T C is performed internal type is thermocouple T Cold junction compensation T C is not performed external Decimal point position 0 No decimal point Displayed when the PV input 1 digit below decimal point type is DC voltage DC 2 digits below decimal point current L or RTD having the 3 digits below decimal point range with the decimal point E l PV input range type When the PV input type is For details refer to the PV ca ca Mu ry PV input range low When the PV input type is limit thermocouple T or RTD R the input range low limit selected with the PV input range type C01 is displayed but the setting is disabled When the PV input type is DC voltage DC current a value ranging from 1999 to 9999 is set PV input range high When the PV input type is limit thermocouple T or RTD R the input range low limit selected with the PV input range type C01 is displayed but the setting is disabled When the PV input type is DC voltage DC current a value ranging from 1999 to 9999 is set SP low limit PV input range low limit to PV input Pn Tata Oo u SP high limit range high limit PV square root 0 0 to 100 0 Displayed when the PV input extraction dropout PV square root extraction is not type is DC voltage DC performed when set at 0 0 current L C
286. ure Data is corrupted by noise or Restart the unit power is shut down while the e Set the data again set data is being set data for AL95 97 and adjustment data for AL96 98 e Replace the unit Adjustment data Data is corrupted by noise or failure power is shut down while the data is being set Al 47 Parameter failure Data is corrupted by noise RAM area AL qA Adjustment data Data is corrupted by noise failure RAM area A 99 ROM failure ROM memory is faulty e Restart the unit e Replace the unit CJ Handling Precautions e f ROM version 1 of the instrument information bank tz is prior to 2 04 CT input failure AL11 is not displayed 10 1 Chapter 10 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING E Operation in case of PV input failure 1 ALO1 02 or 03 occurs Control output It is possible to make the settings so that the operation is continued or not continued Other operation Operation is continued 2 AL occurs in cases other than those shown above All operations are continued The following Table shows the indications and alarms of this unit by the sensor type if PV input failure occurs Thermocouple Failure status Indication value Sensor burnout Sensor burnout Upscale 110 FS CJ failure PV having incorrect cold contact compensation apu 13850 105 FS RTD RTD burnout o Upscale R C a T in ee Upscale oes ALO1 ALO3 EE Upscale mors AL01 ALO3 A A and C
287. ut and event output the status ON OFF you have checked on desired check boxes is output from the output terminal of this unit PV input calibration 1 Select the PV Calibration tab 2 Select the gain No in the ascending order and perform the operation from step 3 3 Click Read 4 Apply the voltage current and resistance values written next to the gain No to the PV input terminal For details about how to connect measuring instruments in the apply status refer Chapter 11 CALIBRATION e The PV input type is T thermocouple This unit Voltage generator Voltage P Current generator generator 5 Keep the apply status for approximately 30 sec 6 Click Write 7 Return to step 2 until the final gain No is completed CJ Handling Precautions e In the PV input calibration always adjust all gains e Do not leave the PV input terminal open during heat up between power ON of this unit and starting of calibration When the input type is thermocouple or DC voltage put the unit in the OV input or terminals are short circuited status When the input type is RTD put the unit in the 100Q input or terminals are short circuited status Chapter 11 CALIBRATION CT Current Transformer input calibration 1 Select the CT input calibration tab 2 Select a desired channel to be calibrated 3 Select Zero from the zero span selection items When selecting a channel perform the Zero
288. utput assign B and D Input Output post setup 2 Internal Event 1 Normally closed normally on 1 FA 3 Internal Event 2 Normally closed normally on 1 C 5 60 0 Default MV1 ON OFF Output 1 Heat Open x re oe No DO Configuration DISP OUT2 EVI enn a jie oma Input Output port setup cule HE Para 2 Oia CIOs ene O Default M 1 ON OFF Output 1 Heat Open HE Setup Range 3 Output assign B OT1 3 1 MV1 ON OFF Time proportional output 1 HEAT OPEN HB Setup Ctrl 3 2 MV2 Time proportional output 2 COOL CLOSE HE Setup SP Osia sesemE ousa 3 Operation 1 A and B or C and D R S atup othan 5 Output assign D Ooms 4 Operation 2 A or B and C or D F Loc i 5 ae 5 Operation 3 4 or B or C or D B DI Configuration o ES gus 6 Operation 4 A and B and C and D Option 7 Polarity B omens HE User Function F e a 8 Polarity C OG ove PB Tuning 9 Polarity D one oes HE Other LE Mode 10 Polarity OT1 7 gt B PID in use 11 Latch One Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION Example 2 The operation is started by the external switch and then it is stopped automatically 30 min after the temperature has reached the set value Explanation Setting example Temperature Set value Control ON Control OFF The timer start up conditions are set to l
289. valid 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 te 8 CJ Handling Precautions e When CtrL Control method is set at 0 ON OFF control the AUTO MANUAL selection becomes invalid e When CtrL Control method is set at 0 ON OFF control or if the PV high limit low limit alarm occurs the AT stop start selection becomes invalid e When C30 LSP system group is set at 1 the LSP group selection becomes invalid 5 73 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH FUNCTION MODE display setup Whether or not the mode related setup items of the parameter setting and mode bank are displayed can be set MODE display setup Whether or not the mode bank setup is Standard Setup setting Setup bank displayed is determined by the sum of the High function following weights Bit 0 AUTO MANUAL display Disabled 0 Enabled 1 Bit 1 RUN READY display Disabled 0 Enabled 2 Bit 3 AT stop start display Disabled 0 Enabled 8 Bit 4 Release all DO latches display Disabled 0 Enabled 16 Bit 5 Communication DI1 ON OFF display Disabled 0 Enabled 32 Other invalid settings 0 4 64 128 AUTO MANUAL display RUN READY display Undefined AT stop start display Release all DO latches display Communication DI1 ON OFF display Undefined Undefined e When using the Smart Loader Package SLP C35 not only the numeric value but also the bit input can be used to set MODE display setup C73
290. value and status and operation keys Detailed description of console mode key When this key is kept pressed for 1 sec or longer in the operation display mode any of the following operations which have been set previously can be performed e AUTO MANUAL mode selection e RUN READY mode selection e AT Auto Tuning start stop selection e LSP Local SP group selection e Release all DO Digital Output latches e ON OFF selection of communication DI Digital Input 1 When pressing the mode key in the setup display mode the display is changed to the operation display para key This key is used to change the display item When this key is kept pressed for 2 sec or longer in the operation display mode the display is then changed to the setup display lt v keys These keys are used to increase or decrease the numeric value or to shift the digit 1 4 E Bottom panel Chapter 1 OVERVIEW Upper display This display shows the PV value or the name of each display item display value or set value If an alarm occurs in the operation display mode the normal display and alarm code are displayed alternately The decimal point at the right end digit shows AT auto tuning or ST self tuning status The decimal point flashes twice repeatedly during execution of AT while it flashes once repeatedly during execution of ST Lower display This display shows the SP value or the display value or set value of each displ
291. values of Internal Events 1 to 3 are displayed in the operation display mode C Handling Precautions e Even though the Internal Event set value is set at Enabled the Internal Event set values are not displayed when the main setting and sub setting are not necessary according to the operation type of Internal Event e The main setting and sub setting of Internal Events 4 to 5 cannot be displayed in the operation display mode E Timer remain time display setup Whether or not the ON delay OFF delay remain time of Internal Events 1 to 3 is displayed in the operation display mode can be set Timer remain time display I 7 7 0 ON OFF delay remain time of Internal Event Standard setup L is not displayed in the operation display High function Setup setting Setup bank mode ON OFF delay remain time of Internal Event 1 is displayed in the operation display mode ON OFF delay remain time of Internal Events 1 to 2 is displayed in the operation display mode ON OFF delay remain time of Internal Events 1 to 3 is displayed in the operation display mode CJ Handling Precautions e Even though the Internal Event timer remain time is set at Enabled the timer remain time is not displayed when the timer remain time display is not necessary according to the operation type of Internal Event e The timer remain time of Internal Events 4 to 5 cannot be displayed in the operation display mode 5 77 Chapter 5 DETAILED DESCRIPT
292. will reach the end of their life due to aged deterioration of parts For those parts that will reach the end of their life due to aged deterioration recommended replacement cycles are prescribed You are required to replace parts based on such recommended replacement cycles 6 Other precautions Prior to your use of Yamatake products you are required to understand and comply with specifications e g conditions and environment of use precautions warnings cautions notices as set forth in the technical documents prepared for individual Yamatake products such as catalogs specifications and instruction manuals to ensure the quality reliability and safety of those products 7 Changes to specifications Please note that the descriptions contained in any documents provided by Yamatake are subject to change without notice for improvement or for any other reason For inquires or information on specifications as you may need to check please contact our branch offices or sales offices or your local sales agents 8 Discontinuance of the supply of products parts Please note that the production of any Yamatake product may be discontinued without notice For repairable products we will in principle undertake repairs for five 5 years after the discontinuance of those products In some cases however we cannot undertake such repairs for reasons such as the absence of repair parts For field instruments we may not be able to undertake parts replac
293. xt character is not received before the time out time shown below passes However the time out time has a fluctuation of 1 ms from the values in the table below Set transmission speed Time out time bps There are two command send message types as shown below Command E Other specifications 8 6 e Supporting the MODBUS Class 0 e Abnormal termination codes e Maximum number of communications data words e Other gt OPEN MODBUS TCP SPECIFICATION Release 1 0 by Modicon Inc 8 3 Description of Commands Chapter 8 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS E Read command 03H Send Message Response Message This is a command capable of reading the contents of continuous data addresses from a specified read start data address with a single message The following is an example of send message while reading data MODBUS ASCII BAHI 30H 41H 30H 33H 30H 33H 45H 39H 30H 30H 30H 32H 30H 35H ODH 0AH 1 Start of message 2 Station address 3 Read command 4 Start word address 5 Read count 6 Checksum LRC 7 Delimiter MODBUS RTU 1 Station address 2 Read command 3 Start word address 4 Read count 5 Checksum CRC A response message corresponding to the command content is returned when the message is correctly received The figure below shows the structure of the response message while reading data MODBUS ASCII o atoto loralo aro Iloro 0 s e s on

SDC15 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents